CN112114414A - Changeable lens - Google Patents

Abstract

The invention provides an interchangeable lens. The interchangeable lens includes: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens in an optical axis direction; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit that controls the transmission/reception unit to repeatedly transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient that is not related to the lens position of the focus adjustment lens to the camera body at a predetermined interval, wherein the control unit varies the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient with time when the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is repeatedly transmitted to the camera body.

Description

Changeable lens

The present application is a divisional application of an invention patent application having an international application date of 2014, 5/9, international application numbers of PCT/JP 2014/062529, national application number of 201480037465.2, and an invention name of "interchangeable lens, camera system, and image pickup apparatus".

Technical Field

The invention relates to a lens barrel, a camera system and an imaging device.

Background

Conventionally, the following techniques are known: a focus adjustment lens is driven at a predetermined driving speed in the optical axis direction, and an evaluation value relating to a contrast based on an optical system is calculated, thereby detecting a focus state of the optical system (for example, refer to patent document 1).

Documents of the prior art

Patent document

Patent document 1: japanese patent application laid-open No. 2010-139666

Disclosure of Invention

Problems to be solved by the invention

An object of the present invention is to provide a lens barrel capable of appropriately detecting a focus adjustment state of an optical system.

Means for solving the problems

The present invention solves the above problems by the following solving means.

The present invention relates to a lens barrel, characterized by comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens in an optical axis direction; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit that controls the transmission/reception unit to repeatedly transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient that is not related to the lens position of the focus adjustment lens to the camera body at a predetermined interval, wherein the control unit varies the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient with time when the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is repeatedly transmitted to the camera body.

In the lens barrel of the present invention, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may be at least one of a maximum value and a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient.

In the above-described lens barrel, the present invention may be configured to include: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens in an optical axis direction; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit that controls the transmission/reception unit to repeatedly transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient that is at least one of a maximum value and a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient to the camera body at predetermined intervals, wherein the control unit changes the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient in accordance with a change in the lens position of the focus adjustment lens when the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is repeatedly transmitted to the camera body.

The present invention relates to a camera system including any one of the above lens barrels and a camera body, the camera system being characterized in that the camera body includes: an acquisition unit configured to acquire the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient from the lens barrel; a focus detection section that calculates an evaluation value relating to a contrast of an image formed by the imaging optical system and detects a focus adjustment state of the imaging optical system; and a driving speed determining section that determines a driving speed of the focus adjustment lens when the focus detecting section detects a focus adjustment state, using the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient.

In view of the above, the present invention provides a lens barrel, comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit capable of controlling the transmission/reception unit to transmit, to the camera body, a 1 st image plane movement coefficient and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient larger than a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient, the 1 st image plane movement coefficient being a coefficient corresponding to TL/TI when a movement amount of the focus adjustment lens is TL and a movement amount of the image plane is TI, and being determined in correspondence with a lens position of the focus adjustment lens.

In accordance with a 2 nd aspect of the present invention, there is provided a lens barrel comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit capable of controlling the transmission/reception unit to transmit, to the camera body, a 1 st image plane movement coefficient and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient smaller than a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient, the 1 st image plane movement coefficient being a coefficient corresponding to TL/TL when a movement amount of the focus adjustment lens is TL and a movement amount of the image plane is TI, and being determined in correspondence with a lens position of the focus adjustment lens.

In the lens barrel according toaspects 1 and 2 of the present invention, the control unit may control the transmission/reception unit to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body when the transmission/reception unit transmits/receives the signal to/from the camera body and the camera body determines that the lens barrel is atype 1 lens, and the control unit may control the transmission/reception unit to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient to the camera body without transmitting the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body when the transmission/reception unit transmits/receives the signal to/from the camera body and the camera body determines that the lens barrel is atype 2 lens different from thetype 1.

Inview 3, the present invention provides a lens barrel, comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit capable of controlling the transmission/reception unit to transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of the focus adjustment lens and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient different from the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and varying in accordance with the lens position of the focus adjustment lens to the camera body.

In a 4 th aspect of the present invention, there is provided a lens barrel comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens in an optical axis direction; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit that controls the transmission/reception unit to transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient that is independent of the lens position of the focus adjustment lens to the camera body, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient being set in accordance with a range in which drive control of the focus adjustment lens is performed.

In the above-described lens barrel of the invention, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may be set according to an image plane movement coefficient as follows: an image plane movement coefficient in a case where the focus adjustment lens is driven in the vicinity of a very close focusing position including the very close focusing position corresponding to a position closest to the imaging optical system that can be focused on the image plane, or in a case where the focus adjustment lens is driven in the vicinity of an infinite focusing position including the infinite focusing position corresponding to a position closest to the infinity side at which the imaging optical system can be focused on the image plane.

In the above-described lens barrel of the invention, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may be set according to an image plane movement coefficient: an image plane movement coefficient in a case where the focus adjustment lens is driven in the vicinity of a very close limit position including a very close limit position corresponding to a position of a limit on a very close side when the focus adjustment lens is drive-controlled, or an image plane movement coefficient in a case where the focus adjustment lens is driven in the vicinity of an infinite limit position including an infinite limit position corresponding to a position of a limit on an infinite side when the focus adjustment lens is drive-controlled.

In the above-described lens barrel of the invention, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may be set according to an image plane movement coefficient: an image plane movement coefficient in a case where the focus adjustment lens is driven in the vicinity of a very near end position including a very near end position corresponding to an end point on a very near side in a range in which the focus adjustment lens is mechanically movable, or an image plane movement coefficient in a case where the focus adjustment lens is driven in the vicinity of an infinite end position including an infinite end position corresponding to an end point on an infinite side in a range in which the focus adjustment lens is mechanically movable.

In the lens barrel of the present invention, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may be at least one of a maximum value and a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient.

In the lens barrel of the present invention, the control unit may control the transmission/reception unit to transmit a corrected 2 nd image plane movement coefficient obtained by correcting the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body instead of the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient, wherein the corrected 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is an image plane movement coefficient corrected to a value smaller than the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient when the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient, and the corrected 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is an image plane movement coefficient corrected to a value larger than the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient when the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient is a maximum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient.

The present invention relates to a camera system including any one of the above lens barrels and a camera body, the camera system being characterized in that the camera body includes: an acquisition unit configured to acquire the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient from the lens barrel; a focus detection section that calculates an evaluation value relating to a contrast of an image formed by the imaging optical system and detects a focus adjustment state of the imaging optical system; and a drive speed determining unit that determines a drive speed of the focus adjustment lens when the focus detecting unit detects a focus adjustment state, using the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient.

In accordance with aspect 5 of the present invention, there is provided a lens barrel comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit capable of controlling the transmission/reception unit to transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient unrelated to the lens position of the focus adjustment lens to a camera body, wherein the control unit controls the transmission/reception unit to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body when the camera body determines that the lens barrel is a 1 st type lens as a result of transmission/reception of signals with the camera body by the transmission/reception unit, and the control unit controls the transmission/reception unit to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body when the camera body determines that the lens barrel is a 2 nd type lens different from the 1 st type as a result of transmission/reception of signals with the camera body by the transmission/reception unit, the control part controls the transceiving part to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient to the camera body without transmitting the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body.

In accordance with a 6 th aspect of the present invention, there is provided a lens barrel comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; a storage unit that stores a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in correspondence with a lens position within a soft limit range of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system, a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient unrelated to the lens position of the focus adjustment lens, and a 3 rd image plane movement coefficient determined in correspondence with a lens position outside the soft limit range of the focus adjustment lens; and a control unit that controls the transmission/reception unit when the camera body determines that the lens barrel is atype 1 lens as a result of transmission/reception of signals with the camera body by the transmission/reception unit, to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body without transmitting the 3 rd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body, when the camera body determines that the lens barrel is atype 2 lens different from thetype 1 as a result of the transmission/reception of the signal with the camera body by the transmission/reception unit, the control part controls the transmitting and receiving part to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient to the camera body, without transmitting the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient and the 3 rd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body.

Anaspect 1 of the present invention relates to an imaging apparatus including: a 1 st acquisition unit configured to repeatedly acquire, from a lens barrel, a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in an optical system; a 2 nd acquisition unit configured to repeatedly acquire a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient from the lens barrel regardless of a lens position of the focus adjustment lens; a 3 rd acquisition unit configured to acquire a focal length of a zoom lens included in the optical system; and a control unit that executes a predetermined operation when it is determined that the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient repeatedly acquired has changed without changing the focal length of the zoom lens.

In accordance with a 2 nd aspect of the present invention, there is provided an imaging apparatus comprising: a 1 st acquisition unit that repeatedly acquires, from a lens barrel, at least one of a maximum value and a minimum value of an image plane movement coefficient of a focus adjustment lens included in an optical system; a 2 nd acquisition unit configured to acquire a focal length of a zoom lens included in the optical system from the lens barrel; and a control unit that executes a predetermined operation when it is determined that the maximum value or the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficient repeatedly acquired has changed without changing the focal length of the zoom lens.

In the above-described imaging apparatus, the imaging apparatus may further include a focus detection unit that calculates an evaluation value relating to a contrast of an image formed by the optical system and detects a focus adjustment state of the optical system.

In the above-described imaging apparatus according to the present invention, the predetermined operation may be control for prohibiting detection of a focus adjustment state by the focus detection unit.

In the above-described imaging apparatus according to the present invention, the predetermined operation may be control of search driving of the focus adjustment lens at a 2 nd speed that is slower than a 1 st speed that is a search driving speed before the determination.

In the above-described imaging apparatus according to the present invention, the predetermined operation may be control for prohibiting notification to a photographer that the focus state is set.

In a 7 th aspect of the present invention, there is provided a lens barrel comprising: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit capable of controlling the transmission/reception unit to transmit, to the camera body, a 1 st image plane movement coefficient and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient smaller than a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient, the 1 st image plane movement coefficient being a coefficient corresponding to TL/TI when a movement amount of the focus adjustment lens is TL and a movement amount of the image plane is TI, and being determined in correspondence with a lens position of the focus adjustment lens.

An 8 th aspect of the present invention relates to a lens barrel, including: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens; a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens; a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and a control unit capable of controlling the transmission/reception unit to transmit, to the camera body, a 1 st image plane movement coefficient and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient larger than a minimum value of the 1 st image plane movement coefficient, the 1 st image plane movement coefficient being a coefficient corresponding to TL/TL when a movement amount of the focus adjustment lens is TL and a movement amount of the image plane is TI, and being determined in correspondence with a lens position of the focus adjustment lens.

In the invention of the lens barrel according to any one of aspects 7 and 8 of the present invention, the lens barrel can be configured, the control unit controls the transmission/reception unit when the camera body determines that the lens barrel is atype 1 lens as a result of transmission/reception of the signal with the camera body by the transmission/reception unit, to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to a camera body, the control unit controls the transmission/reception unit when the camera body determines that the lens barrel is atype 2 lens different from thetype 1 as a result of transmission/reception of the signal with the camera body by the transmission/reception unit, to transmit the 1 st image plane movement coefficient to the camera body without transmitting the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body.

In the lens barrel according to any one of aspects 7 and 8 of the present invention, the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may be changed when a focal length of a zoom lens included in the imaging optical system is changed, and the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient may not be changed even when a lens position of the focus adjustment lens is changed when the focal length of the zoom lens is not changed.

Effects of the invention

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a lens barrel capable of appropriately detecting a focus adjustment state of an optical system.

Drawings

Fig. 1 is a perspective view showing a camera ofembodiment 1.

Fig. 2 is a main part configuration diagram showing the camera ofembodiment 1.

Fig. 3 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of the zoom lens and the lens position (imaging distance) of the focus lens and the image plane movement coefficient K.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lens position (focal length) and a minimum image plane movement coefficient K of a zoom lens_minAnd the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}A table of the relationships of (a).

Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram showing details of theconnection portions 202, 302.

Fig. 6 is a diagram showing an example of command data communication.

Fig. 7 is a diagram showing an example of hotline communication.

Fig. 8 is a flowchart showing an operation example ofembodiment 1.

Fig. 9 is a diagram for explaining the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33.

Fig. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the focus lens position and the focus evaluation value and the relationship between the focus lens position and time when the scanning operation and the focus drive by the contrast detection method of the present embodiment are performed.

Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the operation ofembodiment 3.

Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the clip operation according toembodiment 4.

Fig. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of the focus lens and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation control processing according toembodiment 4.

Fig. 15 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a of the focus lens and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max.

Fig. 16 is a diagram showing a relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the limiting operation in the focus detection.

Fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of the focus lens and the restricting operation.

Fig. 18 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used in embodiment 5 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

Fig. 19 is a diagram illustrating a driving range of thefocus lens 33.

FIG. 20 is a view for explaining correction of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K according to the temperature_minA diagram of the method of (1).

FIG. 21 is a view for explaining the driving according to the lens barrel 3Correcting minimum image plane movement coefficient K by moving time_minA diagram of the method of (1).

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating the maximum predetermined coefficient K0_maxAnd a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minThe figure (a).

Fig. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of manufacturing variations of thelens barrel 3.

Fig. 24 is a main component configuration diagram showing a camera according to another embodiment.

Fig. 25 is a perspective view showing the camera ofembodiment 12.

Fig. 26 is a main component configuration diagram showing a camera according toembodiment 12.

Fig. 27 is a diagram illustrating a driving range of thefocus lens 33.

Fig. 28 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of the zoom lens and the lens position (imaging distance) of the focus lens ofembodiment 12 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

Fig. 29 is a schematic diagram showing details of theconnection portions 202 and 302.

Fig. 30 is a diagram showing an example of command data communication.

Fig. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the hotline communication.

Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing an operation example ofembodiment 12.

Fig. 33 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of the zoom lens and the lens position (imaging distance) of the focus lens ofembodiment 13 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

Fig. 34 is a diagram for explaining the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33.

Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the focus lens position and the focus evaluation value and the relationship between the focus lens position and time when the scanning operation and the focus drive by the contrast detection method of the present embodiment are performed.

Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation ofembodiment 15.

Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the restricting operation ofembodiment 16.

Fig. 38 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of the focus lens and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing a limiting operation control process according toembodiment 16.

Fig. 40 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a of the focus lens and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max.

Fig. 41 is a diagram showing a relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the limiting operation in the focus detection.

Fig. 42 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of the focus lens and the restricting operation.

Fig. 43 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used in embodiment 17 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

Fig. 44 is a main component configuration diagram showing a camera according to another embodiment.

Fig. 45 is a perspective view showing the camera ofembodiment 18.

Fig. 46 is a main component configuration diagram showing a camera according toembodiment 18.

Fig. 47 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of the zoom lens and the lens position (imaging distance) of the focus lens and the image plane movement coefficient K.

Fig. 48 is a schematic diagram showing details of theconnection portions 202 and 302.

Fig. 49 is a diagram showing an example of command data communication.

Fig. 50 is a diagram showing an example of hotline communication.

Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing an operation example ofembodiment 18.

Fig. 52 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process inembodiment 18.

Fig. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a case for explaining a specific example of the abnormality determination processing inembodiment 18.

Fig. 54 is a diagram for explaining the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33.

Fig. 55 is a diagram showing the relationship between the focus lens position and the focus evaluation value and the relationship between the focus lens position and time when the scanning operation and the focus drive by the contrast detection method according toembodiment 18 are performed.

Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the operation ofembodiment 19.

Fig. 57 is a flowchart showing the restricting operation inembodiment 20.

Fig. 58 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of the focus lens and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation control processing according toembodiment 20.

Fig. 60 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the image plane moving speed V1a of the focus lens and the mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0b _ max.

Fig. 61 is a diagram showing a relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the limiting operation in the focus detection.

Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of the focus lens and the restricting operation.

Fig. 63 is a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used inembodiment 21 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

Fig. 64 is a diagram illustrating a driving range of thefocus lens 33.

Fig. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of manufacturing variations of thelens barrel 3.

Fig. 66 is a main component configuration diagram showing a camera according to another embodiment.

Detailed Description

EXAMPLE 1 embodiment

Fig. 1 is a perspective view showing a single-lens reflexdigital camera 1 of the present embodiment. Fig. 2 is a main component configuration diagram showing thecamera 1 of the present embodiment. Thedigital camera 1 of the present embodiment (hereinafter, simply referred to as the camera 1) is composed of acamera body 2 and alens barrel 3, and thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 are detachably coupled to each other.

Thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is attachable to and detachable from thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 2, thelens barrel 3 incorporates a photographing opticalsystem including lenses 31, 32, 33, 34, and 35 and adiaphragm 36.

Thelens 33 is a focusing lens, and can adjust the focal length of the photographing optical system by moving in the direction of the optical axis L1. Thefocus lens 33 is provided movably along the optical axis L1 of thelens barrel 3, and its position is adjusted by a focuslens driving motor 331 while being detected by anencoder 332 for the focus lens.

The focuslens driving motor 331 is, for example, an ultrasonic motor, and drives thefocus lens 33 based on an electric signal (pulse) output from thelens control unit 37. Specifically, the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 by the focuslens driving motor 331 is expressed in pulses/second, and the larger the number of pulses per unit time, the faster the driving speed of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thecamera control unit 21 of thecamera body 2 transmits the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) of thefocus lens 33 to thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 outputs a pulse signal corresponding to the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) transmitted from thecamera body 2 to the focuslens drive motor 331, thereby driving thefocus lens 33 at the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) transmitted from thecamera body 2.

Thelens 32 is a zoom lens, and can adjust the focal length of the photographing optical system by moving in the direction of the optical axis L1. Similarly to the above-describedfocus lens 33, thezoom lens 32 is also detected in position by thezoom lens encoder 322, and is adjusted in position by the zoomlens driving motor 321. The position of thezoom lens 32 is adjusted by operating a zoom button provided in theoperation unit 28 or by operating a zoom ring (not shown) provided in thelens barrel 3.

Further, thelens 34 is a shake correction lens, and can prevent deterioration of a captured image due to hand shake by moving in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis L1. Theshake correction lens 34 is adjusted in position by a shake correctionlens driving member 341 such as a pair of voice coil motors, for example. For example, when hand shake is detected by thelens control unit 37 based on an output of a gyro sensor or the like, not shown, theshake correction lens 34 is driven based on the output of thelens control unit 37.

Thediaphragm 36 is configured to be able to adjust the aperture diameter around the optical axis L1 in order to regulate the light amount of the light beam that reaches theimage pickup device 22 through the photographing optical system and adjust the defocus amount. The aperture diameter of thediaphragm 36 is adjusted by, for example, transmitting an appropriate aperture diameter calculated in the automatic exposure mode from thecamera control unit 21 via thelens control unit 37. In addition, the set opening diameter is input from thecamera control section 21 to thelens control section 37 by manual operation of theoperation section 28 provided in thecamera body 2. The aperture diameter of thediaphragm 36 is detected by a diaphragm aperture sensor, not shown, and the current aperture diameter is recognized by thelens control unit 37.

Thelens memory 38 stores an image plane movement coefficient K. The image plane movement coefficient K is a value indicating a correspondence relationship between a driving amount of thefocus lens 33 and a movement amount of the image plane, and is, for example, a ratio of the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 to the movement amount of the image plane. The details of the image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 will be described later.

On the other hand, thecamera body 2 includes amirror system 220 for guiding a light flux from an object to theimage pickup device 22, theviewfinder 235, thephotometry sensor 237, and thefocus detection module 261. Themirror system 220 includes aquick return mirror 221 that rotates by a predetermined angle between an observation position and an imaging position of an object around arotation shaft 223, and a sub-mirror 222 that is axially supported by thequick return mirror 221 and rotates in accordance with the rotation of thequick return mirror 221. In fig. 2, a state in which themirror system 220 is at the observation position of the object is indicated by a solid line, and a state in which the mirror system is at the image pickup position of the object is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Themirror system 220 is inserted on the optical path of the optical axis L1 in a state of being at the observation position of the object, and rotates so as to retreat from the optical path of the optical axis L1 in a state of being at the image pickup position of the object.

Thequick return mirror 221 is a half mirror, and in a state where it is at an observation position of the object, a part of the light flux (optical axes L2, L3) of the light flux (optical axis L1) from the object is reflected by thequick return mirror 221 and guided to thefinder 235 and thephotometry sensor 237, and a part of the light flux (optical axis L4) is transmitted and guided to the sub-mirror 222. On the other hand, the sub-mirror 222 is configured by a total reflection mirror, and guides the light beam (optical axis L4) transmitted through thequick return mirror 221 to thefocus detection module 261.

Therefore, with themirror system 220 in the observation position, the light flux from the object (optical axis L1) is guided to thefinder 235, thephotometry sensor 237, and thefocus detection module 261, the object is observed by the photographer, and exposure calculation, detection of the focus adjustment state of thefocus lens 33, is performed. Then, if the photographer presses the release button completely, themirror system 220 is rotated to the photographing position, the light flux from the subject (optical axis L1) is entirely guided to theimage pickup element 22, and the photographed image data is stored in thememory 24.

The light flux (optical axis L2) from the subject reflected by thequick return mirror 221 is imaged on thefocal plate 231 disposed on the surface optically equivalent to theimage pickup device 22, and can be observed through thepentaprism 233 and theeyepiece 234. At this time, the transmissiveliquid crystal display 232 displays a focus detection area mark or the like superimposed on the object image on thefocal plate 231, and displays information related to image capturing such as a shutter speed, an aperture value, and the number of images captured in an area outside the object image. In this way, the photographer can observe the subject, the background thereof, the shooting related information, and the like through theviewfinder 235 in the shooting preparation state.

Thephotometric sensor 237 is configured by a two-dimensional color CCD image sensor or the like, and outputs a photometric signal corresponding to the luminance of each region by dividing a shooting screen into a plurality of regions in order to calculate an exposure value at the time of shooting. A signal detected by thephotometry sensor 237 is output to thecamera control section 21 for automatic exposure control.

Theimage pickup device 22 is provided on a predetermined focal plane of a photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 34 on an optical axis L1 of a light flux from an object of thecamera body 2, and ashutter 23 is provided in front of the image pickup device. Theimage pickup device 22 is configured by two-dimensionally arranging a plurality of photoelectric conversion elements, and may be configured by a two-dimensional CCD image sensor, a MOS sensor, a CID, or the like. The image signal photoelectrically converted by theimage pickup device 22 is subjected to image processing by thecamera control unit 21, and then recorded in thecamera memory 24 as a recording medium. Thecamera memory 24 may be any of a removable card memory and a built-in memory.

Thecamera control unit 21 also detects a focus adjustment state of the photographing optical system based on a contrast detection method (hereinafter, referred to as "contrast AF" as appropriate) based on the pixel data read from theimage pickup device 22. For example, thecamera control unit 21 reads the output of theimage pickup device 22, and calculates the focus evaluation value based on the read output. The focus evaluation value can be obtained by extracting a high-frequency component from the output of theimage pickup device 22 using a high-frequency transmission filter, for example. The high-frequency component can also be obtained by extracting the high-frequency component using two high-frequency transmission filters having different cutoff frequencies.

Thecamera control unit 21 performs focus detection based on the contrast detection method as follows: thelens control unit 37 is sent a drive signal to drive thefocus lens 33 at a predetermined sampling interval (distance), and the focus evaluation value at each position is obtained, and the position of thefocus lens 33 at which the focus evaluation value becomes the maximum is obtained as the in-focus position. For example, when the focus evaluation value is calculated while thefocus lens 33 is driven, and when the focus evaluation value changes two times in a rising manner and then two times in a falling manner, the focus position can be obtained by performing a calculation such as an interpolation method using the focus evaluation values.

In the focus detection by the contrast detection method, the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value increases as the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 increases, and when the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 exceeds a predetermined speed, the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value becomes excessively large, and the in-focus position cannot be appropriately detected. This is because the greater the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value, the greater the deviation of the focus position, and the lower the focus accuracy. Therefore, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 so that the moving speed of the image plane when thefocus lens 33 is driven becomes a speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected. For example, in the search control for driving thefocus lens 33 to detect the focus evaluation value, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 so as to achieve the maximum image plane driving speed among the image plane moving speeds at which the sampling interval of the in-focus position can be appropriately detected. The search control includes, for example, wobbling, a vicinity search (vicinity scan) of searching only the vicinity of a predetermined position, and a full-area search (full-area scan) of searching the full drive range of thefocus lens 33.

Thecamera control unit 21 may drive thefocus lens 33 at a high speed when the seek control is started with a half-press of the release switch as a trigger, and may drive thefocus lens 33 at a low speed when the seek control is started with a condition other than the half-press of the release switch as a trigger. This is because, by performing control in this way, contrast AF with a high speed can be performed when the release switch is half-pressed, and contrast AF with a favorable appearance of a preview image can be performed when the release switch is not half-pressed.

Further, thecamera control unit 21 may control thefocus lens 33 to be driven at a high speed in the search control in the still image shooting mode, and thefocus lens 33 to be driven at a low speed in the search control in the moving image shooting mode. This is because, by performing control in this way, contrast AF with a favorable appearance of moving images can be performed in the still image shooting mode at a high speed, and in the moving image shooting mode.

In at least one of the still image shooting mode and the moving image shooting mode, the contrast AF may be performed at a high speed in the moving image shooting mode, and at a low speed in the landscape image shooting mode. Further, the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 during the search control may be changed according to the focal length, the shooting distance, the aperture value, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, focus detection by the phase difference detection method can also be performed. Specifically, thecamera body 2 includes afocus detection module 261, and thefocus detection module 261 has a pair of line sensors (not shown) in which a plurality of pixels each including a microlens arranged in the vicinity of a predetermined focal plane of the imaging optical system and a photoelectric conversion element arranged for the microlens are arranged. Then, a pair of light beams passing through a pair of regions different in exit pupil of the focusinglens 33 are received by each pixel arranged in the pair of line sensors, whereby a pair of image signals can be acquired. Further, by obtaining the phase shift of the pair of image signals acquired by the pair of line sensors by a known correlation operation, focus detection by a phase difference detection method for detecting the focus adjustment state can be performed.

Theoperation unit 28 is an input switch for setting various operation modes of thecamera 1 by a photographer, such as a shutter release button or a moving image photographing start switch, and is capable of switching between a still image photographing mode and a moving image photographing mode and between an autofocus mode and a manual focus mode, and further capable of switching between an AF-S mode and an AF-F mode in the autofocus mode. The various modes set by theoperation unit 28 are transmitted to thecamera control unit 21, and the operation of theentire camera 1 is controlled by thecamera control unit 21. In addition, the shutter release button includes a 1 st switch SW1 turned on by half pressing the button and a 2 nd switch SW2 turned on by full pressing the button.

Here, the AF-S mode is a mode in which, in a case where the shutter release button is half-pressed, after thefocus lens 33 is driven according to the focus detection result, the position of thefocus lens 33 that has been adjusted once is fixed, and photographing is performed at the focus lens position. The AF-S mode is a mode suitable for still picture photography, and is normally selected when still picture photography is performed. The AF-F mode is a mode in which thefocus lens 33 is driven based on the focus detection result regardless of whether or not the shutter release button is operated, and thereafter, the focus state is repeatedly detected, and when the focus state changes, thefocus lens 33 is driven to scan. The AF-F mode is a mode suitable for moving image shooting, and is normally selected when moving image shooting is performed.

In the present embodiment, a switch for switching between the single-shot mode and the continuous shooting mode may be provided as the switch for switching between the autofocus modes. In this case, the AF-S mode can be set when the photographer selects the single-shot mode, and the AF-F mode can be set when the photographer selects the continuous shooting mode.

Next, the image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3 will be described.

The image plane movement coefficient K is a value indicating a correspondence relationship between a driving amount of thefocus lens 33 and a movement amount of the image plane, and is, for example, a ratio of the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 to the movement amount of the image plane. In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient is obtained by, for example, the following equation (1), and the smaller the image plane movement coefficient K is, the larger the amount of movement of the image plane accompanying the driving of thefocus lens 33 is.

Image plane shift coefficient K (driving amount offocus lens 33/shift amount of image plane) … (1)

In thecamera 1 of the present embodiment, even when the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 is the same, the amount of movement of the image plane differs depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33. Similarly, even when the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 is the same, the amount of movement of the image plane differs depending on the lens position of thezoom lens 32, that is, the focal length. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thefocus lens 33 and also the lens position in the optical axis direction of thezoom lens 32, and in the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 stores the image plane movement coefficient K for each lens position of thefocus lens 33 and each lens position of thezoom lens 32.

The image plane shift coefficient K can be defined as, for example, an image plane shift coefficient K (a shift amount of the image plane/a driving amount of the focus lens 33). In this case, the larger the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the amount of movement of the image plane accompanying the driving of thefocus lens 33.

Here, fig. 3 shows a table showing a relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement coefficient K. In the table shown in fig. 3, the drive region of thezoom lens 32 is divided into 9 regions "f 1" to "f 9" in order from the wide angle end toward the telephoto end, and the drive region of thefocus lens 33 is divided into 9 regions "D1" to "D9" in order from the very near end toward the infinity end, and image plane movement coefficients K corresponding to the respective lens positions are stored. For example, in a case where the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" and the lens position (photographing distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", the image plane movement coefficient K is "K11". The table shown in fig. 3 illustrates a state in which the drive region of each lens is divided into 9 regions, but the number is not particularly limited and can be set arbitrarily.

Next, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K will be described with reference to fig. 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe value is a value corresponding to the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficient K. For example, in fig. 3, when "K11" ═ 100 "," K12 "═ 200", "K13" ═ 300 "," K14 "═ 400", "K15" ═ 500 "," K16 "═ 600", "K17" ═ 700 "," K18 "═ 800", and "K19" ═ 900 ", the smallest value, that is," K11 "═ 100", is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe maximum value "K19" is "900" which is the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTypically in accordance with the current lens position of thezoom lens 32. In addition, if the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is generally changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_minAlso a constant value (fixed value). I.e. the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe fixed value (constant value) determined in general in accordance with the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is a value independent of the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33.

For example, in FIG. 3 "K11", "K21", "K31", "K41", "K52", "K62", "K72", "K82" and "K91" shown in gray are minimum image plane movement coefficients K showing the smallest value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_min. That is, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1", the image plane movement coefficient K when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", that is, "K11", becomes the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that represents the minimum value among "D1" to "D9"_min. Therefore, the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K11" to "K19" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" to "D9", and the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K11" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" represent the minimum value. Similarly, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 2", the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K21", when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" also has the smallest value among the image plane movement coefficients K, i.e., "K21" to "K29", when the lens position (imaging distance) is "D1" to "D9". That is, "K21" is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. Hereinafter, similarly, when the lens positions (focal lengths) of thezoom lens 32 are "f 3" to "f 9", the "K31", "K41", "K52", "K62", "K72", "K82" and "K91" shown in gray are also the minimum image plane movement coefficients K_min。

Likewise, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe value is a value corresponding to the maximum value of the image plane movement coefficient K. Maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxTypically in accordance with the current lens position of thezoom lens 32. In addition, in general, if the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_maxAlso a constant value (fixed value). For example, "K19", "K29", "K39", "K49", "K59", "K69", "K79", "K89" and "K99" shown in fig. 3 by hatching are zoom perspective viewsOf the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of themirror 32, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K representing the maximum value_max。

As described above, as shown in fig. 3, thelens memory 38 stores the image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33, and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K indicating the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficients K for each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K indicating a maximum value of the image plane movement coefficients K for each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_max。

Thelens memory 38 may be set as the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minMinimum image plane movement coefficient K of nearby values_min' stored in thelens memory 38 in place of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K representing the smallest value among the image plane movement coefficients K_min. For example, the coefficient K is shifted at the minimum image plane_minWhen the value of (3) is a large number of digits such as 102.345, 100, which is a value near 102.345, can be stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min'. This is because when 100 (the minimum image plane movement coefficient K) is stored in the lens memory 38_min') and store 102.345 (minimum image plane movement coefficient K) in the lens memory 38_min) As compared with the case of (2), the memory capacity of the memory can be saved, and the capacity of the transmission data can be suppressed when transmitting to thecamera body 2.

In addition, for example, the coefficient K is shifted at the minimum image plane_minWhen the value of (d) is 100, 98, which is a value near 100, can be stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in consideration of the stability of control such as gap filling control, mute control (limiting operation), and lens speed control described later_min'. For example, when stability of control is taken into consideration, it is preferable that the actual value (the minimum image plane movement coefficient K) is set_min) Set the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in the range of 80% -120%_min’。

In the present embodiment, furthermore, in thelens memory 38,in addition to the above-described minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIn addition, a corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K obtained by correcting these coefficients is stored_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}. FIG. 4 shows a diagram representing the lens position (focal length) and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K of thezoom lens 32_minAnd the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}A table of the relationships of (a).

That is, as shown in fig. 4, if a case where the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" is exemplified, in thelens memory 38, except for being the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minIn addition to "K11", the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored_{min_x}"K11'" as such, except as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIn addition to "K91", the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is stored as the correction_{max_x}"K91'". Similarly, in the case where the lens positions (focal lengths) of thezoom lens 32 are "f 2" to "f 9", as shown in fig. 4, "K21", "K31", "K41", "K52", "K62", "K72", "K82", and "K91" are also stored as corrected minimum image plane movement coefficients K_{min_x}And "K29 '", "K39'", "K49 '", "K59'", "K69 '", "K79'", "K89 '", and "K99'" are stored as corrected maximum image plane movement coefficients K_{max_x}。

Further, as the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}As long as it passes through the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe coefficient obtained by the correction is not particularly limited, and may be a coefficient having an image plane movement coefficient K larger than the minimum value_minOr a coefficient having a value smaller than the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAny one of the coefficients of the value (b) may be appropriately set according to the purpose thereof. For example, in the present embodiment, as described later, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCan be used to determine to focusThe scanning driving speed V at the time of the scanning operation of thelens 33. On the other hand, however, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is used_minIn the case of (3), depending on the position of theshake correction lens 34 and the posture of thecamera 1, an appropriate scanning drive speed V may not necessarily be calculated due to these influences. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is corrected_{min_x}It is preferable to use a coefficient that takes into account the influence of the position of theshake correction lens 34 and the posture of thecamera 1. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. In addition, in the above example, it is illustrated that there is only one corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}However, the correction device may have a plurality of corrected minimum image plane movement coefficients K_{min_x}。

Further, the maximum image plane shift coefficient K is corrected_{max_x}By shifting the maximum image plane by the factor K_maxThe coefficient obtained by the correction is not particularly limited, and may be a coefficient having a value larger than the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxOr coefficient having a value smaller than the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAny one of the coefficients of the value (b) may be appropriately set according to the purpose thereof. In addition, in the above example, it is illustrated that there is only one corrected maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}However, the image plane shift correction device may have a plurality of corrected maximum image plane shift coefficients K_{max_x}。

Next, a method of communicating data between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 will be described.

Thecamera body 2 is provided with a body-side attachment portion 201 to which thelens barrel 3 is detachably attached. As shown in fig. 1, a connectingportion 202 protruding toward the inner surface side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 is provided in the vicinity of the body-side fitting portion 201 (on the inner surface side of the body-side fitting portion 201). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided in theconnection portion 202.

On the other hand, thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is detachable from thecamera body 2, and thelens barrel 3 is provided with a lens-side mount 301 that is detachably attached to thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 1, a connectingportion 302 protruding toward the inner surface side of the lens-sidefitting portion 301 is provided at a position near the lens-side fitting portion 301 (on the inner surface side of the lens-side fitting portion 301). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided at theconnection portion 302.

Also, if thelens barrel 3 is attached to thecamera body 2, the electrical contact of theconnection portion 202 provided to the body-sidefitting portion 201 and the electrical contact of theconnection portion 302 provided to the lens-sidefitting portion 301 are electrically and physically connected. This enables power supply from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 and data communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 via theconnection portions 202 and 302.

Thecamera body 2 is provided with a body-side attachment portion 201 to which thelens barrel 3 is detachably attached. As shown in fig. 1, a connectingportion 202 protruding toward the inner surface side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 is provided in the vicinity of the body-side fitting portion 201 (on the inner surface side of the body-side fitting portion 201). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided in theconnection portion 202.

On the other hand, thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is detachable from thecamera body 2, and thelens barrel 3 is provided with a lens-side mount 301 that is detachably attached to thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 1, a connectingportion 302 protruding toward the inner surface side of the lens-sidefitting portion 301 is provided at a position near the lens-side fitting portion 301 (on the inner surface side of the lens-side fitting portion 301). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided at theconnection portion 302.

Also, if thelens barrel 3 is attached to thecamera body 2, the electrical contact of theconnection portion 202 provided to the body-sidefitting portion 201 and the electrical contact of theconnection portion 302 provided to the lens-sidefitting portion 301 are electrically and physically connected. This enables power supply from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 and data communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 via theconnection portions 202 and 302.

Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram showing details of theconnection portions 202, 302. Further, the connectingportion 202 is arranged on the right side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 in fig. 5, which simulates an actual fitting structure. That is, theconnection portion 202 of the present embodiment is disposed at a portion further to the rear side than the mounting surface of the body-side mounting portion 201 (a portion further to the right side than the body-side mounting portion 201 in fig. 5). Similarly, theconnection portion 302 is disposed on the right side of the lens-side mounting portion 301, which means that theconnection portion 302 of the present embodiment is disposed at a position protruding from the mounting surface of the lens-side mounting portion 301. By arranging theconnection portion 202 and theconnection portion 302 in the above manner, when the mounting surface of the body-side mounting portion 201 and the mounting surface of the lens-side mounting portion 301 are brought into contact to mount and couple themain body 2 and thelens barrel 3, theconnection portion 202 and theconnection portion 302 are connected, whereby the electrical contacts provided to both theconnection portions 202 and 302 are connected to each other.

As shown in fig. 5, 12 electrical contacts BP1 to BP12 are present at theconnection portion 202. Further, 12 electrical contacts LP1 to LP12 corresponding to the 12 electrical contacts on thecamera body 2 side are present in theconnection portion 302 on thelens 3 side.

The electrical contact BP1 and the electrical contact BP2 are connected to the 1 stpower supply circuit 230 in thecamera body 2. The 1 stpower supply circuit 230 supplies an operating voltage to each part (not including the relatively large power consumption circuits such as thelens drive motors 321 and 331) in thelens barrel 3 via the electrical contact BP1 and theelectrical contact LP 1. The voltage value supplied from the 1 stpower supply circuit 230 via the electrical contact BP1 and the electrical contact LP1 is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a voltage value of 3 to 4V (normally, a voltage value around 3.5V in the middle of the voltage width). In this case, the current value supplied from thecamera body side 2 to thelens barrel side 3 is a current value substantially in the range of several tens mA to several hundreds mA in the power on state. The electrical contacts BP2 and LP2 are ground terminals corresponding to the operating voltage supplied via the electrical contacts BP1 andLP 1.

The electric contacts BP3 to BP6 are connected to the camera-side 1st communication unit 291, and the electric contacts LP3 to LP6 are connected to the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 corresponding to the electric contacts BP3 to BP 6. The camera-side 1st communication unit 291 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 mutually transmit and receive signals by using these electrical contacts. The communication between the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 will be described in detail later.

Thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 is connected to the electrical contacts BP7 to BP10, and thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 is connected to the electrical contacts LP7 to LP10 corresponding to the electrical contacts BP7 to BP 10. Thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 and thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 transmit and receive signals to and from each other by these electrical contacts. The contents of communication performed by the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 and the lens-side 2nd communication unit 382 will be described in detail later.

The electrical contact BP11 and the electrical contact BP12 are connected to the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 in thecamera body 2. The 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 supplies an operating voltage to a circuit having relatively large power consumption, such as thelens drive motors 321 and 331, via the electrical contact BP11 and theelectrical contact LP 11. The voltage value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 is not particularly limited, and the maximum value of the voltage value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 may be about several times the maximum value of the voltage value supplied from the 1 stpower supply circuit 230. In this case, the current value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 to thelens barrel 3 side is a current value substantially in the range of several tens of mA to several a in the power on state. The electrical contacts BP12 and LP12 are ground terminals corresponding to the operating voltage supplied via the electrical contacts BP11 andLP 11.

The 1st communication unit 291 and the 2nd communication unit 292 on thecamera body 2 side shown in fig. 5 constitute the camera transmission/reception unit 29 shown in fig. 1, and the 1st communication unit 381 and the 2nd communication unit 382 on thelens barrel 3 side shown in fig. 5 constitute the lens transmission/reception unit 39 shown in fig. 2.

Next, communication (hereinafter, referred to as command data communication) between the camera-side 1st communication section 291 and the lens-side 1st communication section 381 will be described. Thelens control unit 37 performs command data communication in which transmission of control data from thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 to thelens side 1st communication unit 381 and transmission of response data from thelens side 1st communication unit 381 to thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 are performed in parallel at a predetermined cycle (for example, 16 msec intervals) via the signal line CLK including the electrical contacts BP3 and LP3, the signal line BDAT including the electrical contacts BP4 and LP4, the signal line LDAT including the electrical contacts BP5 and LP5, and the signal line RDY including the electrical contacts BP6 and LP 6.

Fig. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of command data communication. When thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 start command data communication (T1), first, the signal level of the signal line RDY is confirmed. Here, the signal level of the signal line RDY indicates whether or not communication is possible with thelens side 1st communication unit 381, and when communication is not possible, an H (high) level signal is output via thelens control unit 37 and thelens side 1st communication unit 381. The camera-side 1st communication unit 291 does not perform communication with thelens barrel 3 when the signal line RDY is at the H level, or does not perform the following processing when communication is in progress.

On the other hand, when the signal line RDY is at L (low) level, thecamera control section 21 and the camera-side 1st communication section 291 transmit theclock signal 401 to the lens-side 1st communication section 381 via the signal line CLK. In synchronization with theclock signal 401, thecamera control section 21 and thecamera side 1st communication section 291 transmit a camera sidecommand packet signal 402 as control data to thelens side 1st communication section 381 via the signal line BDAT. Further, if theclock signal 401 is output, thelens control section 37 and thelens side 1st communication section 381 transmit the lens sidecommand packet signal 403 as response data by using the signal line LDAT in synchronization with theclock signal 401.

Thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 change the signal level of the signal line RDY from the L level to the H level in accordance with the completion of the transmission of the lens-side command packet signal 403 (T2). Next, thelens control unit 37 starts the 1st control process 404 based on the content of the camera sidecommand packet signal 402 received before the time T2.

For example, in the case where the received camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 is a content requesting specific data on thelens barrel 3 side, as the 1st control process 404, thelens control section 37 performs a process of analyzing the content of thecommand packet signal 402 and generating the requested specific data. Furthermore, as the 1st control processing 404, thelens control section 37 also executes communication error check processing for simply checking whether or not an error is present in communication of thecommand packet signal 402 in accordance with the number of data bytes, using check sum data included in thecommand packet signal 402. The signal of the specific data generated in the 1st control processing 404 is output to thecamera body 2 side as a lens side packet signal 407 (T3). Further, in this case, the camera sidedata packet signal 406 output from thecamera body 2 side after thecommand packet signal 402 is dummy data (including checksum data) having no particular meaning to the lens side. In this case, as the 2 nd control processing 408, thelens control section 37 performs the communication error check processing as described above using the check sum data contained in the camera side packet signal 406 (T4).

For example, when the camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 indicates a drive instruction of thefocus lens 33 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 406 indicates the drive speed and the drive amount of thefocus lens 33, thelens control unit 37 analyzes the content of thecommand packet signal 402 and generates a confirmation signal indicating that the content is understood as the 1 st control processing 404 (T2). The confirmation signal generated in the 1st control processing 404 is output to thecamera body 2 as the lens side packet signal 407 (T3). In addition, as the 2 nd control processing 408, thelens control section 37 performs analysis of the content of the cameraside packet signal 406, and performs communication error check processing using check sum data included in the camera side packet signal 406 (T4). After the 2 nd control processing 408 is completed, thelens control unit 37 drives the focuslens drive motor 331 based on the received camera-side packet signal 406, that is, the drive speed and the drive amount of thefocus lens 33, and drives thefocus lens 33 at the received drive speed and by the received drive amount (T5).

Further, when the 2 nd control processing 408 is completed, thelens control section 37 notifies thelens side 1st communication section 381 of the completion of the 2nd control processing 408. Thereby, thelens control section 37 outputs the L-level signal to the signal line RDY (T5).

The communication performed between the above-described times T1 to T5 is one command data communication. As described above, in the primary command data communication, thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 transmit the camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 406 one each. In this way, in the present embodiment, the control data transmitted from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 is divided into two and transmitted for convenience of processing, but the two camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 406 are combined to constitute one control data.

Similarly, in the primary command data communication, thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 transmit the lens-sidecommand packet signal 403 and the lens-sidedata packet signal 407 one each. In this way, although the response data transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2 is also divided into two, the lens-sidecommand packet signal 403 and the lens-sidedata packet signal 407 are also combined into two pieces to constitute one response data.

Next, communication between thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 and thelens side 2 nd communication unit 382 (hereinafter, referred to as passive infrared communication) will be described. Returning to fig. 5, thelens control unit 37 performs hot-line communication in a cycle (for example, 1 millisecond interval) shorter than command data communication by the signal line HREQ including the electrical contacts BP7 and LP7, the signal line HANS including the electrical contacts BP8 and LP8, the signal line HCLK including the electrical contacts BP9 and LP9, and the signal line HDAT including the electrical contacts BP10 and LP 10.

For example, in the present embodiment, the lens information of thelens barrel 3 is transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2 by hot-line communication. The lens information transmitted by the hot-wire communication includes the lens position of thefocus lens 33, the lens position of thezoom lens 32, and the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. Here, the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curThe image plane movement coefficient K is a coefficient corresponding to the current lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 can obtain the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 and thefocus lens 33 by referring to a table indicating the relationship between the lens position (zoom lens position and focus lens position) and the image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38Current position image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to current lens position_cur. For example, in the example shown in fig. 3, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D4", thelens control unit 37 uses "K14" as the current position image plane movement coefficient K through hotline communication_curAnd taking K11 as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd taking K19 as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd sent to thecamera control section 21. In addition, as will be described later, the present embodiment may include the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K described above_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}Instead of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K as lens information_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Here, fig. 7 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the hotline communication. Fig. 7(a) is a diagram showing a case where the hotline communication is repeatedly executed every predetermined cycle Tn. Fig. 7(b) shows a case where the period Tx of one of the repeatedly executed hot line communications is extended. Hereinafter, a case where the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is communicated by the hot-line communication will be described with reference to the timing chart of fig. 7 (b).

Thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 first output an L-level signal to the signal line HREQ to start communication by the hotline communication (T6). Next, thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 notifies thelens control unit 37 that the signal is input to the electrical contact LP 7. Thelens control unit 37 starts thegeneration processing 501 for generating lens position data in response to the notification. Thegeneration processing 501 is processing in which thelens control unit 37 causes thefocus lens encoder 332 to detect the position of thefocus lens 33 and generates lens position data indicating the detection result.

When thelens control section 37 executes thecompletion generation processing 501, thelens control section 37 and the lens-side 2nd communication section 382 output a signal of L level to the signal line HANS (T7). When the signal is input to the electrical contact BP8, thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 output theclock signal 502 to the signal line HCLK from theelectrical contact BP 9.

In synchronization with theclock signal 502, thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 2nd communication unit 382 output a lens position data signal 503 indicating lens position data to the signal line HDAT from the electrical contact LP 10. Next, when the transmission of the lens position data signal 503 is completed, thelens control section 37 and thelens side 2nd communication section 382 output a signal of H level from the electrical contact LP8 to the signal line HANS (T8). When the signal is input to the electrical contact BP8, thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 outputs an H-level signal to the signal line HREQ from the electrical contact LP7 (T9).

Further, command data communication and hotline communication can be performed simultaneously or in parallel.

Next, an operation example of thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, the following operation is started by turning on the power of thecamera 1.

First, in step S101, thecamera body 2 performs communication for identifying thelens barrel 3. This is because communication modes capable of performing communication differ depending on the type of the lens barrel. Then, proceeding to step S102, in step S102, thecamera control section 21 determines whether or not thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to apredetermined type 1 communication format. If it is determined as a result that the shot is a shot corresponding to thetype 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S103. On the other hand, if thecamera control unit 21 determines that thelens barrel 3 is a lens not corresponding to thepredetermined type 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S112. Further, thecamera control unit 21 may proceed to step S112 when determining that thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to a communication format of the 2 nd type different from the communication format of the 1 st type. Further, thecamera control unit 21 may proceed to step S103 when determining that thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to the communication formats of the 1 st and 2 nd categories.

Next, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the live view photographing on/off switch provided in theoperation section 28 is operated to be on by the photographer, and if the live view photographing is set to be on, themirror system 220 reaches the photographing position of the object, and the light flux from the object is guided to theimage pickup element 22.

In step S104, hotline communication is started between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3. In the passive infrared communication, as described above, when thelens control unit 37 receives the L-level signal (request signal) output to the signal line HREQ by thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292, thelens control unit 21 transmits the lens information, and such transmission of the lens information is repeated. The lens information includes, for example, the lens position of thefocus lens 33, the lens position of thezoom lens 32, and the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxEach piece of information. The hotline communication is repeated after step S104. The hot line communication is repeated until the power switch is turned off, for example.

In addition, thelens control unit 37 may correct the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}Sent to thecamera control section 21 in place of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Here, in the present embodiment, when transmitting the lens information to thecamera control unit 21, thelens control unit 37 refers to a table (see fig. 3) stored in thelens memory 38 and indicating the relationship between each lens position and the image plane movement coefficient K, and acquires the current position image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position of thefocus lens 33_curAnd a minimum image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd the obtained current position image surface movement coefficient K is used_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxTo thecamera control section 21.

In the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set by hotline communication_minWhen the data is transmitted to thecamera control section 21, the data is alternately transmittedGround-transmitted minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}. That is, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is transmitted during the 1 st process_minNext, during the 2 nd processing period following the 1 st processing period, the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K is transmitted_{min_x}. Then, in a 3 rd processing period following the 2 nd processing period, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is transmitted again_minThen, the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K is alternately transmitted_{min_x}And a minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min。

For example, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1", thelens control unit 37 alternately transmits the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K as "K11", "K11", "K11", "K11'", and … in this order_{min_x}And "K11" as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min"K11'". In this case, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is changed by performing the driving operation of thezoom lens 32, for example, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 2", from now on, "K21" and "K21 '" corresponding to "f 2" are alternately transmitted, and when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is not changed, "K11" and "K11'" are continuously and alternately transmitted.

Similarly, thelens control unit 37 shifts the maximum image plane by the coefficient K_maxWhen the image data is sent to thecamera control unit 21, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is also sent alternately_maxAnd correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}。

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the photographer has performed a half-press operation (turning on the 1 st switch SW 1) or an AF start operation on the release button provided in theoperation unit 28, and when these operations have been performed, the process proceeds to step S106 (hereinafter, the case where the half-press operation has been performed will be described in detail).

Next, in step S106, thecamera control unit 21 transmits a scan drive command (a scan drive start instruction) to thelens control unit 37 to perform focus detection by the contrast detection method. The scan drive command (the instruction of the drive speed or the instruction of the drive position during the scan drive) to thelens control unit 37 may be provided at the drive speed of thefocus lens 33, at the image plane movement speed, or at the target drive position.

Then, in step S107, thecamera control unit 21 controls thecamera control unit 21 to perform the image plane movement on the basis of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K acquired in step S104_minOr correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}A process of determining the scanning drive speed V, which is the drive speed of thefocus lens 33 during the scanning operation, is performed.

First, the use of the minimum image plane shift coefficient K will be exemplified below_minAnd correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}Minimum image plane movement coefficient K in_minTo determine the condition of the scanning driving speed V.

In the present embodiment, the scanning operation refers to the following operation: thefocus lens 33 is driven at the scanning drive speed V determined in this step S107 by the focuslens drive motor 331, and the calculation of the focus evaluation value by the contrast detection method is simultaneously performed at predetermined intervals by thecamera control section 21, whereby the detection of the in-focus position by the contrast detection method is performed at predetermined intervals.

In this scanning operation, when detecting the in-focus position by the contrast detection method, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the focus evaluation value at predetermined sampling intervals while scanning and driving thefocus lens 33, and detects the lens position at which the calculated focus evaluation value reaches the peak as the in-focus position. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 calculates focus evaluation values on different image planes by moving the image plane based on the optical system in the optical axis direction by scanning and driving thefocus lens 33, and detects a lens position at which the focus evaluation values reach a peak as an in-focus position. On the other hand, if the moving speed of the image plane is too high, the interval between the image planes at which the focus evaluation value is calculated may become too large, and the in-focus position may not be detected properly. In particular, since the image plane movement coefficient K indicating the movement amount of the image plane with respect to the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 changes depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thefocus lens 33, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at a constant speed, depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, there are cases where: since the moving speed of the image plane is too fast, the interval between image planes for calculating the focus evaluation value becomes too large, and the in-focus position cannot be appropriately detected.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the minimum image plane movement coefficient K obtained in step S104_minThe scanning driving speed V at the time of performing the scanning driving of thefocus lens 33 is calculated. Thecamera control section 21 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe scanning drive speed V is calculated so that the scanning drive speed V becomes a drive speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected by the contrast detection method and reaches the maximum drive speed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the coefficient K is moved according to the minimum image plane depending on, for example, the position of theshake correction lens 34 and the posture of thecamera 1_minWhen the scanning drive speed V is determined, the appropriate scanning drive speed V may not necessarily be calculated, and therefore, in such a case, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is replaced with the appropriate scanning drive speed V_minUsing the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}To determine the scanning driving speed V. In particular, it is considered that an optical error occurs when the optical path length of light entering thelens barrel 3 changes from the case where theshake correction lens 34 is at the center position to the case where theshake correction lens 34 is at the center position, in accordance with the position of theshake correction lens 34. Alternatively, depending on the posture of the camera 1 (particularly, when thecamera 1 is directed in a direction in which the camera is directed upward in the vertical direction, downward in the vertical direction, or the like), the mechanical positions of thelenses 31, 32, 33, 34, and 35 are slightly shifted due to their own weights or the like, and thus, it is considered that an optical error occurs. In particular, such a phenomenon is considered to occur even in the case of a large-sized lens barrel having a lens structure of the lens barrel. Therefore, in this embodiment In the embodiment, when such a situation is detected, the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_{min_x}To determine the scanning driving speed V instead of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min。

Further, for example, whether or not to use the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K is determined in accordance with the position of theshake correction lens 34_{min_x}To replace the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minIn the case of (3), data of the position of theblur correction lens 34 is acquired from thelens control unit 37, and it can be determined that the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used when the driving amount of theblur correction lens 34 is equal to or more than a predetermined amount based on the acquired data_{min_x}. Alternatively, whether or not to use the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K is determined in accordance with the posture of thecamera 1_{min_x}To replace the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minIn the case of (3), an output of an attitude sensor not shown is acquired, and based on the acquired sensor output, when the orientation of thecamera 1 is at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the horizontal direction, it can be determined that the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_{min_x}. Further, it may be determined whether or not to use the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K based on both the data of the position of theshake correction lens 34 and the output of the attitude sensor_{min_x}To replace the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min。

Then, in step S108, the scanning action is started at the scanning driving speed V determined in step S107. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 sends a scan drive start command to thelens control unit 37, and thelens control unit 37 drives the focuslens drive motor 331 in accordance with the command from thecamera control unit 21, thereby scan-driving thefocus lens 33 at the scan drive speed V determined in step S107. Thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 at the scanning drive speed V, reads pixel outputs from the image pickup pixels of theimage pickup device 22 at predetermined intervals, calculates a focus evaluation value, obtains focus evaluation values at different focus lens positions, and detects a focus position by a contrast detection method.

Next, in step S109, thecamera control unit 21 determines whether or not the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected (whether or not the in-focus position can be detected). When the peak of the focus evaluation value cannot be detected, the process returns to step S108, and the operations of steps S108 and S109 are repeated until the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected or thefocus lens 33 is driven to a predetermined driving end. On the other hand, when the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected, the process proceeds to step S110.

When the peak value of the focus evaluation value can be detected, the process proceeds to step S110, and in step S110, thecamera control section 21 transmits an instruction for driving in focus to a position corresponding to the peak value of the focus evaluation value to thelens control section 37. Thelens control unit 37 controls the driving of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the received command.

Next, the process proceeds to step S111, and in step S111, thecamera control unit 21 determines that thefocus lens 33 has reached a position corresponding to the peak of the focus evaluation value, and performs still-picture shooting control when the photographer performs a full-press operation of the shutter release button (turning on the 2 nd switch SW 2). After the imaging control ends, the process returns to step S104 again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S102 that thelens barrel 3 is a lens not corresponding to thepredetermined type 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S120 are executed. In steps S112 to S120, the same processing as in steps S103 to S111 described above is performed except for the following two points: when transmission of lens information is repeatedly performed by hot-line communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3, the transmission does not include the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAs lens information (step S113); and replacing the minimum image plane movement coefficient K when determining the scanning driving speed V as the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 in the scanning operation_minOr correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And using the current position image plane movement coefficient K contained in the lens information_curThis point (step S116).

As described above, in the present embodimentIn the system, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K which is the minimum image plane shift coefficient is stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minAnd the maximum image plane movement coefficient K which is the maximum image plane movement coefficient_maxUsing the minimum image plane movement coefficient K among the image plane movement coefficients K stored in thelens memory 38_minThe scanning drive speed V is calculated so as to be the maximum drive speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected by the contrast detection method, and therefore, even when thefocus lens 33 is driven to scan until the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the minimum value (for example, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained)_minThe same value), the calculation interval of the focus evaluation values (the interval of the image planes on which the focus evaluation values are calculated) can be set to a size suitable for focus detection. Thus, according to the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven in the optical axis direction, even when the image plane movement coefficient K changes and the final image plane movement coefficient K becomes small (for example, when the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set to be the image plane movement coefficient K)_minIn the case of (2), the detection of the focused position by the contrast detection method can be appropriately performed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is excluded_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxBesides, the minimum corrected image plane movement coefficient K is stored_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}In a predetermined case (for example, a case where theshake correction lens 34 is at a predetermined position, a case where the posture of thecamera 1 is in a predetermined state), the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is replaced_minUsing the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}Since the scanning drive speed V is calculated, the scanning drive speed V can be determined with higher accuracy, and thus the detection of the focus position by the contrast detection method can be performed more appropriately.

EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE

Next,embodiment 2 of the present invention will be explained. Inembodiment 2, in thecamera 1 shown in fig. 1, the lens is moved in accordance with the lens position of the focusing lens 33Minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored inlens memory 38 ofbarrel 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxExcept for this, the present invention has the same configuration as that ofembodiment 1, and operates in the same manner and provides the same operational effects.

As described above, in thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment, the optical path length of the light entering thelens barrel 3 until reaching theimage pickup device 22 changes depending on the position of theshake correction lens 34 as compared with the case where theshake correction lens 34 is at the center position, but such tendency differs depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33. That is, even when the position of theshake correction lens 34 is the same, the degree of change in the optical path length differs depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33 with respect to the case where theshake correction lens 34 is at the center position. In contrast, inembodiment 2, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set according to the lens position of thefocus lens 33_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIn step S107 shown in fig. 8, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is used to determine the scanning drive speed V during the scanning operation_minAnd determines the scanning driving speed V. Thus, the scanning drive speed V can be calculated more appropriately.

Inembodiment 2, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is set as_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxFor example, as shown in a table shown in fig. 3, a table indicating the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32, the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33, and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be used_minAnd the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe relationship of (a). Alternatively, the image plane movement coefficient K at the current position is obtained using the table shown in fig. 3_curFor the image plane movement coefficient K of the current position_curMultiplying or adding a predetermined constant to or from the minimum image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the lens position of thefocus lens 33 can also be obtained_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

EXAMPLE 3

Next,embodiment 3 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 3 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 1 operates as described below.

That is, inembodiment 3, in the flowchart shown in fig. 8 ofembodiment 1, when the in-focus position can be detected by the contrast detection method in step S109, it is determined whether or not to perform the gap filling driving when the in-focus driving is performed based on the result of the contrast detection method in step S110, and the driving form of thefocus lens 33 when the in-focus driving is performed is different based on the determination, which is the same as that ofembodiment 1 except that this point is different.

That is, the focuslens driving motor 331 for driving thefocus lens 33 shown in fig. 2 is generally configured by a mechanical driving transmission mechanism, and such a driving transmission mechanism is configured by the 1st driving mechanism 500 and the 2nd driving mechanism 600, and includes the following configurations, for example, as shown in fig. 9: by driving the 1st drive mechanism 500, the 2nd drive mechanism 600 on the focusinglens 33 side is driven, and thereby the focusinglens 33 is moved to the very near side or the infinite side. In such a drive mechanism, the gap amount G is usually provided in view of smooth operation of the meshing portion of the gears. On the other hand, in the contrast detection method, in this mechanism, as shown in fig. 10(a) and 10(B), thefocus lens 33 needs to be driven to the in-focus position by reversing the driving direction after passing through the in-focus position once by the scanning operation. In this case, when the gap filling drive is not performed as shown in fig. 10(B), there is a characteristic that the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is shifted from the in-focus position by the gap amount G. Therefore, in order to eliminate the influence of the gap amount G, as shown in fig. 10(a), when thefocus lens 33 is driven to focus, it is necessary to perform gap filling driving in which the driving direction is again reversed and the lens is driven to the focus position after passing through the focus position once.

Fig. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the focus lens position and the focus evaluation value and the relationship between the focus lens position and time when the scanning operation and the focus drive by the contrast detection method of the present embodiment are performed. Fig. 10(a) shows the following configuration: at time t0, the scanning operation of thefocus lens 33 is started from infinity to the close side from the lens position P0, and then, at time t1 when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the lens position P1, if the peak position (focus position) P2 of the focus evaluation value is detected, the scanning operation is stopped, and the focus drive with the gap filling drive is performed, so that thefocus lens 33 is driven to the focus position attime t 2. On the other hand, fig. 10(B) shows the following form: similarly, at time t0, after the scanning operation is started, at time t1, the scanning operation is stopped, and the focus driving is performed without the gap filling driving, so that thefocus lens 33 is driven to the in-focus position attime t 3.

Next, an operation example inembodiment 3 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in fig. 11. In the flowchart shown in fig. 8, when the in-focus position is detected by the contrast detection method in step S109, the following operation is performed. That is, as shown in fig. 10 a and 10B, when the scanning operation is started from time t0 and the peak position (in-focus position) P2 of the focus evaluation value is detected at time t1 when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the lens position P1, the scanning operation is executed attime t 1.

That is, when the in-focus position is detected by the contrast detection method, first, in step S201, thecamera control unit 21 acquires the minimum image plane movement coefficient K at the current lens position of thezoom lens 32_min. Further, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image can be obtained from thelens control unit 37 through the lens transmitting/receivingunit 39 and the camera transmitting/receivingunit 29 by the above-described hot-wire communication between thecamera control unit 21 and thelens control unit 37.

Next, in step S202, thecamera control unit 21 acquires information on the gap amount G (see fig. 9) of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33. The gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 can be acquired by storing it in alens memory 38 provided in thelens barrel 3 in advance, for example, and referring to it. Specifically, the information can be acquired by transmitting a request for transmitting the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 to thelens control unit 37 via the camera transmission/reception unit 29 and the lens transmission/reception unit 39, and causing thelens control unit 37 to transmit the information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 stored in thelens memory 38. Alternatively, the following configuration may be adopted: the lens information transmitted and received by the above-described hot-wire communication between thecamera control unit 21 and thelens control unit 37 includes information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 stored in thelens memory 38.

Next, in step S203, thecamera control unit 21 controls the camera based on the minimum image plane movement coefficient K acquired in step S201_minAnd the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is calculated from the information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 acquired in step S202. The image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is a movement amount of the image plane when the focus lens is driven by the same amount as the gap amount G, and is calculated according to the following equation in the present embodiment.

Image plane movement amount IG corresponding to gap amount G is equal to gap amount G × minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min

Next, in step S204, thecamera control unit 21 performs a process of comparing the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G calculated in step S203 with the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, and determines whether or not the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP as a result of the comparison, that is, whether or not "the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G" is equal to or less than "the predetermined image plane movement amount IP" is established. The predetermined image plane movement amount IP is set in accordance with the focal depth of the optical system, and is usually set to an image plane movement amount corresponding to the focal depth. Since the predetermined image plane movement amount IP is set to the depth of focus of the optical system, it can be set as appropriate according to the F value, the cell size of theimaging device 22, and the format of the captured image. That is, the predetermined image plane movement amount IP can be set to be larger as the F value is larger. Alternatively, the predetermined image plane movement amount IP can be set to be larger as the unit size of theimage pickup device 22 is larger or the image format is smaller. When the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, the process proceeds to step S205. On the other hand, if the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is larger than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S205, it is determined in step S204 that the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, and therefore, in this case, it is determined that the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 can be within the depth of focus of the optical system even when the gap filling drive is not performed, and it is determined that the gap filling drive is not performed during the focus drive, and based on this determination, the focus drive is performed without the gap filling drive. That is, it is determined that thefocus lens 33 is directly driven to the focus position at the time of focus driving, and based on this determination, focus driving without gap filling driving is performed as shown in fig. 10 (B).

On the other hand, in step S206, since it is determined in step S204 that the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is larger than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, in this case, it is determined that the lens position of thefocus lens 33 after driving cannot be made within the focal depth of the optical system if the gap filling driving is not performed, and it is determined that the gap filling driving is performed during the focus driving, and based on the determination, the focus driving accompanied by the gap filling driving is performed. That is, when thefocus lens 33 is driven to perform focus driving, the focus lens passes through the focus position once and then is driven to the focus position by performing reverse driving again, and based on this determination, as shown in fig. 10(a), focus driving accompanied by gap filling driving is performed.

Inembodiment 3, as described above, the following gap filling control is performedAccording to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33, calculates an image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G, determines whether or not the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the calculated gap amount G is equal to or less than a predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system, and determines whether or not to execute the gap filling drive when the focus drive is performed. As a result of the determination, when the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system and the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 can be within the focal depth of the optical system, the gap filling drive is not performed, and when the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is larger than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system and the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 cannot be within the focal depth of the optical system without the gap filling drive, the gap filling drive is performed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the gap filling drive is not required, the gap filling drive is not performed, and the time required for the focusing drive can be shortened, thereby shortening the time of the focusing operation. On the other hand, when the gap filling drive is required, the gap filling drive is performed, whereby excellent focusing accuracy can be obtained.

In particular, inembodiment 3, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_minBy calculating an image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 and comparing it with a predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gap filling drive at the time of focusing is required.

In the gap filling control according toembodiment 3 described above, thecamera control unit 21 may determine whether or not gap filling is necessary based on the focal length, the aperture, and the object distance. Thecamera control unit 21 may change the driving amount of the gap filling according to the focal length, the aperture, and the object distance. For example, in the case where the aperture is reduced to be smaller than the predetermined value (the F value is large), it may be determined that gap filling is not necessary or that the driving amount of gap filling is controlled to be reduced, as compared with the case where the aperture is not reduced to be smaller than the predetermined value (the F value is small). Further, for example, it may be determined that gap filling is not necessary or controlled so that the driving amount of gap filling is reduced on the wide angle side as compared with the telephoto side.

EXAMPLE 4 embodiment

Next,embodiment 4 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 4 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 1 operates as described below.

That is, inembodiment 4, the limiting operation (mute control) described below is performed. Inembodiment 4, the movement speed of the image plane of thefocus lens 33 is controlled to be constant in the search control based on the contrast detection method, while the limiting operation for suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 is performed in the search control based on the contrast detection method. Here, the limiting operation performed inembodiment 4 is an operation for limiting the speed of thefocus lens 33 so as not to fall below the mute lower limit lens movement speed when the speed of thefocus lens 33 becomes slow and muting is hindered.

Inembodiment 4, as will be described later, thecamera control unit 21 of thecamera body 2 compares the predetermined mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b with the focus lens driving speed V1a by using a predetermined coefficient (Kc) to determine whether or not the limiting operation should be performed.

When thecamera control unit 21 permits the limiting operation, thelens control unit 37 limits the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b in order to avoid the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33, which will be described later, from falling below the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b. The following is a detailed description with reference to the flowchart shown in fig. 12. Here, fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation (mute control) according toembodiment 4.

In step S301, thelens control unit 37 acquires the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. The mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control unit 37 can acquire the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b from thelens memory 38.

In step S302, thelens control unit 37 acquires a drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 can acquire the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 by transmitting the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 to thelens control unit 37 by command data communication.

In step S303, thelens control unit 37 compares the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b acquired in step S301 with the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 acquired in step S302. Specifically, thelens control unit 37 determines whether or not the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec), and proceeds to step S304 when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed, and proceeds to step S305 when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

In step S304, it is determined that the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In this case, thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b in order to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33. In this way, when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, thelens control unit 37 limits the lens drive speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

On the other hand, in step S305, it is determined that the driving instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2 is equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In this case, since the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 of a predetermined value or more is not generated (or the driving sound is extremely small), thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 at the driving instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2.

Here, fig. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and is a diagram in which the vertical axis is the lens driving speed and the horizontal axis is the image plane movement coefficient K. As shown on the horizontal axis in fig. 13, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, and in the example shown in fig. 13, the image plane movement coefficient K tends to be smaller toward the very near side and larger toward the infinity side. In contrast, in the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven during the focus detection operation, the actual driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 changes depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33 as shown in fig. 13 because the movement speed of the image plane is driven at a constant speed. That is, in the example shown in fig. 13, when thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the moving speed of the image plane is constant, the lens moving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is slower on the very near side and faster on the infinity side.

On the other hand, as shown in fig. 13, in the case of driving thefocus lens 33, if the image plane movement speed in such a case is shown, it is constant as shown in fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max due to the driving of thefocus lens 33, and is a diagram in which the vertical axis is the image plane movement speed and the horizontal axis is the image plane movement coefficient K. In fig. 13 and 15, the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement speed by the driving of thefocus lens 33 are both indicated by V1 a. Therefore, V1a is variable (not parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 as shown in fig. 13, and is constant (parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the image plane moving speed as shown in fig. 15.

Further, when thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the moving speed of the image plane is constant, if the operation is not restricted, the lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 may be lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b as in the example shown in fig. 13. For example, when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K can be obtained_minThe position of the focus lens 33 (minimum image plane movement coefficient K in fig. 13)_min100), the lens moving speed V1a is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

In particular, when the focal length of thelens barrel 3 is long and the light environment is bright, the lens movement speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 tends to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In such a case, as shown in fig. 13, thelens control unit 37 performs the limiting operation to limit the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (so as to be controlled to a speed not lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b) (step S304), thereby suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33.

Next, referring to fig. 14, a limiting operation control process for determining whether to permit or prohibit the limiting operation shown in fig. 12 will be described. Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation control processing of the present embodiment. The operation limiting control processing described below is executed by thecamera body 2 when, for example, the AF-F mode or the moving image capturing mode is set.

First, in step S401, thecamera control unit 21 acquires lens information. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 acquires the current image plane movement coefficient K from thelens barrel 3 by hot-line communication_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

Then, in step S402, thecamera control unit 21 calculates a mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max. The image plane movement speed V0b _ max at the lower limit of mute is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe movement speed of the image plane when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the above-described mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max will be described in detail below.

First, as shown in fig. 13, it is determined whether or not a driving sound is generated due to the driving of thefocus lens 33 based on the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33, and therefore, as shown in fig. 13, the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b is a constant speed in the case of being expressed by the lens driving speed. On the other hand, if the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is expressed by the image plane movement speed, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33 as described above, and thus is variable as shown in fig. 15. In fig. 13 and 15, the mute lower limit lens movement speed (the lower limit value of the actual driving speed of the focus lens 33) and the image plane movement speed when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed are both indicated by V0 b. Therefore, V0b is constant (parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 as shown in fig. 13, and variable (not parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the image plane moving speed as shown in fig. 15.

In the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the image plane movement speed is constant, the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is set so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be obtained_minThe movement speed of thefocus lens 33 at the position of the focus lens 33 (in the example shown in fig. 15, the image plane movement coefficient K is 100) is the image plane movement speed of the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. That is, in the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed, the image plane movement speed that reaches the maximum (in the example shown in fig. 15, the image plane movement coefficient K is 100 or less) is set to the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the maximum image plane movement speed (the image plane movement speed at the lens position at which the image plane movement coefficient becomes minimum) among the image plane movement speeds corresponding to the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, which vary depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, is calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max. For example, in the example shown in fig. 15, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTo "100", the image plane movement speed at the lens position of thefocus lens 33 whose image plane movement coefficient is "100" is therefore calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max.

Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 uses the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec) and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K as shown in the following expression_min(unit: pulse/mm), the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) is calculated.

The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is equal to the mute lower limit lens movement speed (actual driving speed of the focus lens) V0 b/the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min

Thus, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_minThe mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated, so that the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max can be calculated at the timing of starting the focus detection or the motion picture photography by the AF-F. For example, in the example shown in fig. 15, when focus detection or moving image shooting by AF-F is started at a timing t1 ', the image plane movement speed at the lens position of thefocus lens 33 at which the image plane movement coefficient K is "100" can be calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max at this timing t 1'.

Next, in step S403, thecamera control unit 21 compares the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection acquired in step S401 with the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max calculated in step S402. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 determines whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a (unit: mm/sec) for focus detection and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) satisfy the following expression.

(image plane moving speed V1a XKc for focus detection) > mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0b _ max

In the above expression, the coefficient Kc is a value of 1 or more (Kc ≧ 1), and details thereof will be described later.

If the above expression is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404, and thecamera control unit 21 allows the restricting operation shown in fig. 12. That is, in order to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33, as shown in fig. 13, the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is limited to the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b (seek control is performed so that the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is not lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b).

On the other hand, if the above expression is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S405, and the restricting operation shown in fig. 12 is prohibited. That is, in a case where the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is not limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is allowed to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b), thefocus lens 33 is driven at the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected.

Here, as shown in fig. 13, if the limiting operation is allowed and the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the movement speed of the image plane becomes faster at a lens position where the image plane movement coefficient K is small, and as a result, the movement speed of the image plane becomes faster than the image plane movement speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, and appropriate in-focus accuracy may not be obtained. On the other hand, when the limiting operation is prohibited and thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the moving speed of the image plane becomes the image plane moving speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, as shown in fig. 13, there is a case where the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b and a driving sound of a predetermined value or more is generated.

As described above, when the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection is lower than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, it may be a problem that thefocus lens 33 is driven at a lens driving speed lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b so as to obtain the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, or that thefocus lens 33 is driven at a lens driving speed equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b so as to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the above expression is satisfied even when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the coefficient Kc in the above expression is stored in advance as a value of 1 or more that can ensure a certain focus detection accuracy. Thus, as shown in fig. 15, when the above expression is satisfied even when the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection is lower than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, thecamera control unit 21 determines that a certain focus detection accuracy can be secured, preferentially suppresses the driving sound of thefocus lens 33, and permits the limiting operation of driving thefocus lens 33 at a lens driving speed lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

On the other hand, if the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is equal to or less than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, if the limiting operation is permitted and the drive speed of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the image plane movement speed for focus detection may be too high to ensure the focus detection accuracy. Therefore, if the above expression is not satisfied, thecamera control unit 21 prioritizes the focus detection accuracy and prohibits the limiting operation shown in fig. 12. Thus, the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected can be set as the image plane movement speed at the time of focus detection, and focus detection can be performed with high accuracy.

Further, when the aperture value is large (the aperture opening is small), the depth of field becomes deep, and therefore the sampling interval at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected becomes wide. As a result, the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected can be increased. Therefore, when the image plane moving speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected is a fixed value, thecamera control unit 21 can increase the coefficient Kc of the above expression as the aperture value increases.

Similarly, in the case where the image size of a live view image or the like is small (the case where the compression rate of the image is high or the thinning rate of pixel data is high), since high focus detection accuracy is not required, the coefficient Kc of the above expression can be increased. In addition, the coefficient Kc of the above equation can be increased even when the pixel pitch in theimage sensor 22 is large.

Next, the control of the restricting operation will be described in more detail with reference to fig. 16 and 17. Fig. 16 is a diagram showing a relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the limiting operation at the time of focus detection, and fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining a relationship between the actual lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 and the limiting operation.

For example, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the search control is started with the half-press of the release switch as a trigger and when the search control is started with a condition other than the half-press of the release switch as a trigger, the moving speed of the image plane in the search control may be different depending on the still image shooting mode and the moving image shooting mode, the moving image shooting mode and the landscape image shooting mode, or the focal length, the shooting distance, the aperture value, or the like. In fig. 16, such different moving speeds V1a _1, V1a _2, V1a _3 of 3 image planes are illustrated.

Specifically, the image plane moving speed V1a _1 at the time of focus detection shown in fig. 16 is the maximum moving speed among the moving speeds of the image plane in which the focus state can be appropriately detected, and is the moving speed of the image plane satisfying the relationship of the above expression. The image plane movement speed V1a _2 at the time of focus detection is slower than the image plane movement speed V1a _1, but is the image plane movement speed satisfying the relationship of the above expression at timing t 1'. On the other hand, the image plane movement speed V1a _3 at the time of focus detection is a movement speed of the image plane that does not satisfy the relationship of the above expression.

In this way, in the example shown in fig. 16, when the moving speed of the image plane at the time of focus detection is V1a _1 and V1a _2, the relationship of the above expression is satisfied at the timing t1, and therefore the restricting operation shown in fig. 16 is permitted. On the other hand, when the moving speed of the image plane at the time of focus detection is V1a _3, the relationship of the above expression is not satisfied, and therefore the restricting operation shown in fig. 12 is prohibited.

This point will be specifically described with reference to fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a diagram illustrating a vertical axis of the diagram illustrated in fig. 16, in which the image plane movement speed is changed from the lens driving speed. As described above, the lens driving speed V1a _1 of thefocus lens 33 satisfies the relationship of the above expression, and therefore allows the restricting operation. However, as shown in fig. 17, the lens driving speed V1a _1 is not lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b even at the lens position where the minimum image plane movement coefficient (K is 100) can be obtained, and therefore, the limiting operation is not actually performed.

Further, since the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 also satisfies the relationship of the above equation at the timing t 1' that is the start timing of the focus detection, the restricting operation is allowed. In the example shown in fig. 17, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the lens driving speed V1a _2, the lens driving speed V1a _2 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is K1, and therefore the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 is limited at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is smaller than K1 at the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

That is, by performing the limiting operation at the lens position where the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the movement speed V1a _2 of the image plane at the time of focus detection is subjected to the search control of the focus evaluation value at a movement speed of the image plane different from the movement speed (search speed) of the image plane immediately before the image plane. That is, as shown in fig. 16, at the lens position where the image plane movement coefficient is smaller than K1, the image plane movement speed V1a — 2 at the time of focus detection is a speed different from the constant speed immediately before.

Further, since the lens driving speed V1a _3 of thefocus lens 33 does not satisfy the relationship of the above expression, the restricting operation is prohibited. Therefore, in the example shown in fig. 17, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the lens driving speed V1a _3, the lens driving speed V1a _3 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is K2, but the restricting operation is not performed at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K smaller than K2 can be obtained, and the restricting operation is not performed even if the driving speed V1a _3 of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b in order to appropriately detect the focus state.

As described above, inembodiment 4, the maximum image plane movement speed among the image plane movement speeds in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, and the calculated mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is compared with the image plane movement speed V1a at the time of focus detection. When the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is higher than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, it is determined that focus detection accuracy equal to or higher than a certain level can be obtained even when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and the limiting operation shown in fig. 12 is permitted. Thus, in the present embodiment, the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 can be suppressed while ensuring the focus detection accuracy.

On the other hand, when the drive speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is equal to or less than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, there is a case where appropriate focus detection accuracy cannot be obtained. Therefore, in this embodiment, the limiting operation shown in fig. 12 is prohibited in order to obtain an image plane moving speed suitable for focus detection. Thus, in the present embodiment, the in-focus position can be appropriately detected at the time of focus detection.

In the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in advance in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minUsing the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in fig. 10, at the timing t1 when moving image shooting is started or focus detection is performed in the AF-F mode, it is possible to determine whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) for focus detection exceeds the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max, and determine whether or not the limiting operation is performed. In this way, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is not used at the current position_curThe minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be used by repeatedly determining whether to perform the limiting operation_minSince whether or not to perform the limiting operation is determined at the first timing of starting the moving image capturing or the focus detection in the AF-F mode, the processing load of thecamera body 2 can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the restricted operation control process shown in fig. 12 is executed in thecamera body 2 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the restricted operation control process shown in fig. 12 may be executed in thelens barrel 3.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the image plane movement coefficient K is calculated by the image plane movement coefficient K (the driving amount of thefocus lens 33/the movement amount of the image plane) is exemplified as shown in the above expression, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a configuration in which the calculation is performed as shown in the following expression may be adopted.

Image plane shift coefficient K ═ (amount of shift of image plane/amount of drive of focus lens 33)

Further, in this case, thecamera control section 21 can calculate the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max as follows. That is, as shown in the following equation, thecamera control unit 21 can determine the maximum image plane movement coefficient K that indicates the maximum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32, and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec)_max(unit: pulse/mm), the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) is calculated.

The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is equal to the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b/maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max

For example, in the case of adopting a value calculated by "the movement amount of the image plane/the driving amount of thefocus lens 33" as the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the value (absolute value), the larger the movement amount of the image plane in the case of driving the focus lens by a predetermined value (e.g., 1 mm). In the case of adopting a value calculated by "driving amount of thefocus lens 33/moving amount of the image plane" as the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the value (absolute value), the smaller the moving amount of the image plane in the case of driving the focus lens by a predetermined value (e.g., 1 mm).

In addition to the above-described embodiment, the limiting operation and the limiting operation control process may be executed when a mute mode for suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 is set, and the limiting operation control process may not be executed when the mute mode is not set. When the mute mode is set, the drive sound of thefocus lens 33 may be preferentially suppressed, and the restricting operation shown in fig. 12 may be always performed without performing the restricting operation control processing shown in fig. 14.

In the above-described embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is (the driving amount of thefocus lens 33/the movement amount of the image plane), but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the image plane movement coefficient K is defined as (the amount of movement of the image plane/the amount of driving of the focus lens 33), the maximum image plane movement coefficient K can be used_maxThe control such as the limiting operation is performed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

EXAMPLE 5 EXAMPLE

Next, embodiment 5 of the present invention will be explained. Embodiment 5 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except for the following differences. Fig. 18 shows a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used in embodiment 5 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

That is, in embodiment 5, regions "D0", "X1" and "X2" are provided, which are regions on the more proximal side than the region "D1" on the most proximal side shown in fig. 3. Similarly, regions "D10", "X3" and "X4" are provided, which are regions further on the infinity side than the region "D9" on the infinity side shown in fig. 3. First, the "D0", "X1" and "X2" regions, which are the regions closer to the extreme side, and the "D10", "X3" and "X4" regions, which are the regions further to the infinity side, will be described below.

Here, as shown in fig. 19, in the present embodiment, the focusinglens 33 is configured to be movable in theinfinity direction 410 and theclose proximity direction 420 on an optical axis L1 indicated by a one-dot chain line in the drawing. A mechanical end point (mechanical end point) 430 in theinfinity direction 410 and amechanical end point 440 in theclose proximity direction 420 are provided with stoppers (not shown) to restrict the movement of thefocus lens 33. That is, the focusinglens 33 is configured to be movable from amechanical end point 430 in theinfinity direction 410 to amechanical end point 440 in theclose proximity direction 420.

However, the range in which thelens control section 37 actually drives thefocus lens 33 is smaller than the above-described range from themechanical end point 430 to themechanical end point 440. Specifically describing the movement range, thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 in a range from an infinitesoft limit position 450 provided inside amechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410 to a very closesoft limit position 460 provided inside amechanical end point 440 in the veryclose direction 420. That is, the lens driving section 212 drives thefocus lens 33 between the very closesoft limit position 460 corresponding to the position of the drive limit on the very close side and the infinitesoft limit position 450 corresponding to the position of the drive limit on the infinite side.

The infinitesoft limit position 450 is disposed to the outer side than theinfinite focus position 470. The infinity-side focusing position 470 is a position of the focusinglens 33 corresponding to the position on the infinity side where the photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, 34, 35 and thediaphragm 36 can focus. The reason why the infinitesoft limit position 450 is provided at such a position is that when focus detection by the contrast detection method is performed, there may be a peak of the focus evaluation value at theinfinite focus position 470. That is, if theinfinity focus position 470 and theinfinity limit position 450 are made to coincide, there is a problem that the peak of the focus evaluation value existing at theinfinity focus position 470 cannot be recognized as the peak, and in order to avoid such a problem, theinfinity limit position 450 is set to be located outside theinfinity focus position 470. Similarly, the very closesoft limit position 460 is set to the outer side than the very close in-focus position 480. Here, the veryclose focus position 480 is a position of thefocus lens 33 corresponding to a position closest to the side where the photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, 34, and 35 and thediaphragm 36 can focus.

The "D0" region shown in fig. 18 is a position corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460, and the "X1" and "X2" regions are regions located on the very close side of the very close soft limit position, and are, for example, a position corresponding to themechanical end point 440 in the veryclose direction 420, a position between the very close soft limit position and theend point 440, and the like. The "D10" region shown in fig. 18 is a position corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450, and the "X3" and "X4" regions are regions on the infinite side of the infinite soft limit position, and are, for example, a position corresponding to themechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410, a position between the infinite soft limit position and theend point 430, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", and … "K90" in the "D0" region corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460 of these regions can be set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. Similarly, the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450 can be set as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

In the present embodiment, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 11", "α 21", … "α 91" in the "X1" region are smaller than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", … "K90" in the "D0" region. Likewise, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 12", "α 22", … "α 92" in the "X2" region are smaller than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", … "K90" in the "D0" region. In addition, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 13", "α 23", … "α 93" in the "X3" region are larger than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region. The values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 14", "α 24", … "α 94" in the "X4" region are larger than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K ("K10", "K20", … "K90") in "D0" is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient K ("K110", "K210" … "K910") in "D10" is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. In particular, the "X1", "X2", "X3" and "X4" regions are regions where thefocus lens 33 is not driven or thefocus lens 33 needs to be driven less frequently depending on the conditions of aberrations, mechanical mechanisms, and the like. Therefore, even if the image plane corresponding to the "X1", "X2", "X3" and "X4" regions is moved in the systemThe numbers "α 11", "α 21", … "α 94" are set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIt also does not help with proper autofocus control (e.g., speed control of the focusing lens, mute control, gap fill control, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient in the region "D0" corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460 is set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient in the "D10" region corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450 is set as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxBut is not limited thereto.

For example, even if the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the regions "X1", "X2" on the very near side from the very near soft limit position and the regions "X3" and "X4" on the infinite side from the infinite soft limit position are stored in thelens memory 38, the image plane movement coefficient that is the smallest among the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the positions of the focus lens included in the search range (scanning range) of the contrast AF may be set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minSetting the maximum image plane movement coefficient of the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the position of the focus lens included in the search range of the contrast AF as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. Further, the image plane movement coefficient corresponding to the veryclose focus position 480 may be set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane shift coefficient corresponding to theinfinity position 470 is set as the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_max。

Alternatively, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set so that the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the minimum value when thefocus lens 33 is driven to the vicinity of the verysoft limit position 460. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set as follows: the image plane movement coefficient K when driven to the vicinity of the very closesoft limit position 460 becomes the smallest value as compared with when thefocus lens 33 is moved to any position between the very closesoft limit position 460 and the infinitesoft limit position 450.

Similarly, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set so that the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the maximum value when thefocus lens 33 is driven to the vicinity of the infinitesoft limit position 450. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set as follows: the image plane movement coefficient K when driven to the vicinity of the infinitesoft limit position 450 becomes the maximum value, as compared with when thefocus lens 33 is moved to any position between the extremely closesoft limit position 460 and the infinitesoft limit position 450.

EXAMPLE 6 EXAMPLE

Next, embodiment 6 of the present invention will be explained. Embodiment 6 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except for the following differences. That is, in the above-describedembodiment 1, in thecamera 1 shown in fig. 1, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAn example of transmission to thecamera body 2 is explained. In contrast, in embodiment 6, thelens control unit 37 corrects the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 according to the temperature_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2.

Here, fig. 20 is a diagram for explaining correction of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K according to the temperature_minA diagram of the method of (1). In the present embodiment, thelens barrel 3 is configured to include a temperature sensor (not shown), and as shown in fig. 20, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is corrected in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature sensor_min. That is, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 is set to be the minimum value_minThe minimum image plane movement coefficient K at normal temperature (25 ℃ C.) is set_minFor example, as shown in fig. 20, when the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in thelens memory 38_minWhen the value is "100", thelens control unit 37 transmits the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to thecamera body 2 when the temperature sensor detects that the temperature of the lens barrel is normal temperature (25 ℃)_min"100". On the other hand, by means of a temperature sensorWhen the temperature of the lens barrel is detected to be 50 ℃, thelens control section 37 corrects the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38_min"100" to shift the minimum image plane by the coefficient K_min"102" is sent to thecamera body 2. Likewise, in the case where the temperature of thelens barrel 3 detected by the temperature sensor is 80 ℃, thelens control section 37 corrects the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38_min"100" to shift the minimum image plane by the coefficient K_min"104" is sent to thecamera body 2.

In the above description, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is exemplified and explained_minFor the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCan also be matched with the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrection according to the temperature of thelens barrel 3 is similarly performed.

According to embodiment 6, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to be varied according to the temperature of thelens barrel 3_minTransmitted to thecamera body 2, and therefore uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that varies according to the temperature of thelens barrel 3_minThis has an effect of realizing appropriate autofocus control (for example, speed control of the focus lens, mute control, gap filling control, and the like) even when the temperature of thelens barrel 3 changes.

(7 th embodiment)

Next, embodiment 7 of the present invention will be explained. Embodiment 7 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except for the following differences. That is, in embodiment 7, thelens control section 37 corrects the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 according to the driving time of thelens barrel 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2.

Here, fig. 21 is a diagram for explaining correction of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K according to the driving time of the lens barrel 3_minA diagram of the method of (1). In the present embodiment, thelens barrel 3 is provided with a timer (not shown), and as shown in fig. 21, the timer is providedThe drive time of thelens barrel 3 is timed, and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is corrected_min. In general, if thelens barrel 3 is driven for a long time, the temperature of thelens barrel 3 rises due to heat generation of a motor or the like that drives thelens barrel 3, and therefore, the temperature of the lens barrel rises according to the driving time of the lens barrel 3 (the shooting time, the time when the power of the camera is turned on, and the like). Therefore, in embodiment 7, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is corrected according to the driving time of thelens barrel 3_min。

For example, in fig. 21, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K when stored in thelens memory 38_minIn the case of a value of "100", when it is detected by a timer provided in thelens barrel 3 that the driving time of thelens barrel 3 is less than 1 hour, thelens control section 37 transmits the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to thecamera body 2_min"100". On the other hand, when it is detected by the timer of thelens barrel 3 that the driving time of thelens barrel 3 is 1 hour or more and less than 2 hours, thelens control section 37 corrects the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38_min"100" to shift the minimum image plane by the coefficient K_min"102" is sent to thecamera body 2. Likewise, when it is detected by the timer of thelens barrel 3 that the driving time of thelens barrel 3 is 2 hours or more and less than 3 hours, thelens control section 37 corrects the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38_min"100" to shift the minimum image plane by the coefficient K_min"104" is sent to thecamera body 2.

In the above description, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is exemplified_minFor the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCan also be matched with the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrection corresponding to the driving time of thelens barrel 3 is similarly performed.

According to embodiment 7, the temperature of thelens barrel 3 is detected according to the driving time of thelens barrel 3, and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that changes according to the temperature of thelens barrel 3 is detected_minIs transmitted to thecamera body 2, and therefore, the most varied according to the temperature of the lens barrel is usedSmall image plane shift coefficient K_minThis has an effect of realizing appropriate autofocus control (for example, speed control of the focus lens, mute control, gap filling control, and the like) even when the temperature of the lens barrel changes.

EXAMPLE 8 th embodiment

Next, embodiment 8 of the present invention will be explained. Embodiment 8 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except for the following differences. That is, in the above-describedembodiment 1, in thecamera 1 shown in fig. 1, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAn example of transmission to thecamera body 2 is explained. In contrast, in embodiment 8, thelens control unit 37 shifts the image plane by the coefficient K for the current position_curApplying a predetermined operation to calculate the maximum predetermined coefficient K0_maxAnd a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minMaximum predetermined coefficient K0_maxAnd a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minTransmitted to thecamera body 2 in place of the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. This is for performing optimal control (for example, speed control, mute control, gap filling control, and the like of the focus lens) corresponding to the lens position of thefocus lens 33 on thecamera body 2.

Here, fig. 22 is a diagram illustrating the maximum predetermined coefficient K0_maxAnd a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minThe figure (a). As shown in fig. 22, when thefocus lens 33 changes from the very near side position "D1" to the infinity side position "D9", the current position image plane shift coefficient K_curThe variation is 100, 120 … 600.

In embodiment 8, as shown in example a in fig. 22, the image plane can be moved by a coefficient K with respect to the current position_curAdding a predetermined value to calculate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minThe composition of (1). In the example a of fig. 22, thelens control unit 37 uses, for example, an arithmetic expression (minimum predetermined coefficient)K0_minCurrent position image plane movement coefficient K_cur+20) to calculate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2. Further, for the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCan also be matched with a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minSimilarly, the calculation is performed by addition.

Alternatively, in fig. 22, in case B, the image plane can be moved by the coefficient K at the current position_curSubtracting a predetermined value to calculate a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minThe composition of (1). In the example B of fig. 22, thelens control unit 37 uses, for example, an arithmetic expression (minimum predetermined coefficient K0)_minCurrent position image plane movement coefficient K_cur-20) to operate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2. Further, for the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCan also be matched with a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minSimilarly, the difference is obtained by subtraction.

Furthermore, in fig. 22, C is an example in which the current position image plane is moved by the coefficient K according to the moving direction of thefocus lens 33_curAdding or subtracting a predetermined value to calculate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minExamples of (1). In the example C of fig. 22, thelens control unit 37 uses the arithmetic expression (minimum predetermined coefficient K0) when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the infinity side_minCurrent position image plane movement coefficient K_cur+20) to calculate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2. Conversely, when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the very near side, the arithmetic expression (minimum predetermined coefficient K0) is used_minCurrent position image plane movement coefficient K_cur-20) to operate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2. For maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCan also be matched with a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minSimilarly, the value is determined by addition or subtraction.

In addition, in the example D of fig. 22, the image plane movement coefficient K is calculated by applying the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMultiplying by a predetermined value to operate a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minExamples of (1). In example D of fig. 22, thelens control unit 37 uses an arithmetic expression (minimum predetermined coefficient K0)_minCurrent bitSet image plane movement coefficient K_curX 1.1) to operate the minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minAnd transmits it to thecamera body 2. For maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCan also be matched with a minimum predetermined coefficient K0_minSimilarly, the calculation is performed by multiplication.

In addition, in the examples a to D shown in fig. 22, the 1 st coefficient (the minimum predetermined coefficient K0) can be used_min) Coefficient 2 (minimum predetermined coefficient K0) of nearby values_min) To determine whether gap packing is required. For example, in case a, when the position of the focus lens is in the region D9, a lens having the 1 st coefficient (minimum predetermined coefficient K0) can be used_min) Coefficient 2 (minimum predetermined coefficient K0) of values around "600_min) "620" to determine if gap packing is required. Therefore, for example, in a mode in which only the vicinity of the area D9 is searched (a mode in which only a part of the soft limit is searched without searching the full range of the soft limit), whether or not the gap filling is necessary can be determined using the image plane movement coefficient close to the image plane movement coefficient at the in-focus position.

EXAMPLE 9 EXAMPLE

Next,embodiment 9 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 9 has the same configuration asembodiment 1 except for the following differences. That is, in the above-describedembodiment 1, in thecamera 1 shown in fig. 1, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAn example of transmission to thecamera body 2 is explained. In contrast,embodiment 9 differs in the following respects: correction coefficients K6 and K7 are stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 corrects the minimum image plane shift coefficient K using the correction coefficients K6 and K7 stored in thelens memory 38_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2.

Fig. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of manufacturing variations of thelens barrel 3. For example, in this embodimentIn the embodiment, thelens barrel 3 is designed to have the minimum image plane shift coefficient K in the stages of designing the optical system and the mechanical mechanism_minSet to "100", the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in thelens memory 38_min"100". However, in the mass production process of thelens barrel 3, a manufacturing variation occurs due to a manufacturing error or the like at the time of mass production, and the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe normal distribution shown in FIG. 23 is shown.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K in the mass production process of thelens barrel 3 is used as the reference_minThe correction coefficient K6 is determined to be "+ 1" in the normal distribution, and "+ 1" is stored as the correction coefficient K6 in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3. Thelens control unit 37 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_min("100") and correction coefficient K6 ("+ 1"), for the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrecting (100+1 equals to 101), and correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("101") to thecamera body 2.

In addition, for example, in the stage of designing the optical system and the mechanical mechanism, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is set_maxSet to "1000", the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in thelens memory 38_max"1000". Maximum image plane movement coefficient K in batch production process_maxDistributed according to the normal distribution, and the maximum image plane shift coefficient K distributed according to the normal distribution_maxIn the case where the average value of (1) is "990", "-10" is stored as the correction coefficient K7 in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3. Thelens control unit 37 uses the maximum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_max("1000") and a correction coefficient K7 ("-10"), for the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCorrecting (1000-10 equals to 990), and correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max("990") is sent to thecamera body 2.

Further, the above-mentioned minimum image planemovement coefficient K_min100, maximum image planemovement coefficient K_max1000, correction factorThe values of K6 "+ 1" and correction coefficient K7 "-10" are exemplary, and any value may be set. In addition, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe correction of (2) is not limited to addition and subtraction, and various operations such as multiplication and division can be combined.

EXAMPLE 10

Next, embodiment 10 of the present invention will be explained. The 10 th embodiment has the same configuration as the 3 rd embodiment except for the following differences. That is, in embodiment 10, the correction coefficient K8 is stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 corrects the minimum image plane shift coefficient K using the correction coefficient K8 stored in thelens memory 38_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and thelens control section 37 and thecamera control section 21 use the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThereby performing gap filling control.

That is, as described above, inembodiment 3, thelens control unit 37 transmits the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to thecamera control unit 21_minAnd a gap amount G (see steps S201 and S202 in fig. 11), thecamera control unit 21 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a gap amount G to calculate an image plane movement amount IG. When "image plane movement amount IG" is equal to or smaller than "predetermined image plane movement amount IP", it is determined that gap stuffing is "unnecessary", and control is performed such that gap stuffing drive is not performed during focus drive.

However, on the other hand, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is caused by a manufacturing error or the like at the time of mass production of thelens barrel 3_minIf a deviation occurs (see fig. 23), or if the mechanical mechanism of thelens barrel 3 changes over time (wear of gears for driving lenses, wear of members for holding lenses, etc.), the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is set to be the smallest value_minIf the variation occurs, appropriate gap filling driving may not be performed. Therefore, in this embodimentIn the formula, thelens memory 38 stores the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in consideration of_minThelens control unit 37 uses the correction coefficient K8 so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is equal to the correction coefficient K8 of the deviation or change_minCorrecting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to a value larger than that before correction_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2.

For example, in the present embodiment, when a value of "100" is stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in thelens memory 38_minAnd stores a value of "1.1" as the correction coefficient K8, thelens control section 37 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_min("100") and correction coefficient K8 ("1.1"), for the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrecting (100 × 1.1 ═ 110), and correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K after correction_min("110") to thecamera body 2. Thecamera control unit 21 uses the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min(110) and a gap amount G, and when the predetermined image plane movement amount IP is satisfied, it is determined that gap stuffing is not required and control is not performed during focus driving, and when the predetermined image plane movement amount IP is satisfied, it is determined that gap stuffing is required and control is performed during focus driving.

In this way, in the present embodiment, by using the correction coefficient K8, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction is used_min(100) the smallest image plane movement coefficient K_min("110") to determine if gap packing is required. Therefore, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction is used_min(100) is easier to determine that gap filling is "unnecessary", even when the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is caused by manufacturing errors, secular changes, and the like_minEven when the change occurs, excessive gap filling drive can be suppressed, and the speed of contrast AF can be increased. In addition, the appearance of the preview image can be improved.

For example, the correction coefficient K8 is preferably set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression in consideration of manufacturing errors, secular changes, and the like.

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_minX 1.2 is not less than the minimum image plane movement coefficient K after correction_minMinimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_min

The correction coefficient K8 can be set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression, for example.

1.2≥K8＞1

Further, in the present embodiment, the correction factor K is used for correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient_minThe correction coefficient K8 is used for correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe correction coefficient K9 is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control section 37 corrects the maximum image plane movement coefficient K using the correction coefficient K9_maxAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and detailed description is omitted.

EXAMPLE 11 th embodiment

Next,embodiment 11 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 11 has the same configuration asembodiment 4 described above, except for the following differences. That is, in the above-describedembodiment 4, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 is used_minAn example of mute control (restricting operation) is performed. In contrast,embodiment 11 differs fromembodiment 4 in the following respects: thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3 stores a correction coefficient K10, and thelens control unit 37 corrects the minimum image plane shift coefficient K using the correction coefficient K10 stored in thelens memory 38_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and thelens control section 37 and thecamera control section 21 use the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd mute control is performed.

As described above, inembodiment 4, thelens control unit 37 transmits the current image plane movement coefficient K to thecamera control unit 21_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (see step S401 in fig. 14), thecamera control unit 21 operates The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated (refer to step S402 in fig. 14). Thecamera control unit 21 determines that the limiting operation is "permitted" when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc for focus detection > the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is satisfied, and determines that the limiting operation is "prohibited" when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc for focus detection < the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is satisfied.

However, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is caused by a manufacturing error (see fig. 23) or the like at the time of mass production of thelens barrel 3_minWhen the deviation occurs, or when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is caused by a secular change in the mechanical mechanism of the lens barrel 3 (wear of the gear for driving the lens, wear of the member for holding the lens, etc.)_minIf the change occurs, appropriate mute control (operation restriction) may not be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K will be considered_minThe deviation of (d), the changed correction coefficient K10 is stored in thelens memory 38. Thelens control section 37 uses the correction coefficient K10 so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is_minCorrecting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to a value smaller than that before correction_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2.

For example, in the present embodiment, when a value of "100" is stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in thelens memory 38_minAnd stores a value of "1.1" as the correction coefficient K10, thelens control section 37 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_min("100") and correction coefficient K10 ("1.1"), for the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrecting (100 × 1.1 ═ 110), and correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K after correction_min("110") to thecamera body 2. Thecamera control unit 21 uses the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("110"), it is determined whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc < mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max for focus detection is established.

In the present embodiment, the correction coefficient K10 is used, so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction is used_min(100) the smallest image plane movement coefficient K_min("110") and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction are used to determine whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc < mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max for focus detection is satisfied_minThe operation is not easily determined as "prohibited" in comparison with the case of the ("100"). Therefore, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained even when the image plane movement coefficient K is caused by manufacturing errors, secular changes, and the like_minEven when the change occurs, it is possible to suppress the practical limiting operation and to realize the special effect of the mute control reliably.

For example, the correction coefficient K10 is preferably set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression in consideration of manufacturing errors, secular changes, and the like.

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_minX 1.2 is not less than the minimum image plane movement coefficient K after correction_minMinimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_min

The correction coefficient K10 can be set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression, for example.

1.2≥K10＞1

In addition, in the present embodiment, the correction factor K is used for correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient_minThe correction coefficient K10 is used for correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe correction coefficient K11 is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control section 37 corrects the maximum image plane movement coefficient K using the correction coefficient K11_maxAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and detailed description is omitted.

The embodiments described above are described for easy understanding of the present invention, and are not described for limiting the present invention. Therefore, the elements disclosed in the above embodiments are intended to include all design modifications and equivalents that fall within the technical scope of the present invention. The above embodiments can also be used in appropriate combinations.

For example, inembodiment 1, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is exemplified_minAnd correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}Alternately sent to the camera control section 21The form of feeding them is not particularly limited to this form. For example, it is possible to repeat transmission of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K twice in succession_minThen sending the minimum image plane movement coefficient K of correction twice continuously_{min_x}In such an operation mode, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K may be transmitted repeatedly twice in succession_minThen transmits the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K once_{min_x}The mode of such an operation. In addition, in this case, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}The same can be set.

In addition, inembodiment 1, for example, the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set to have 2 or more_{min_x}In the case of the form (2), the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set_minAnd more than 2 corrected minimum image plane movement coefficients K_{min_x}When the image data is transmitted to thecamera control section 21, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is repeatedly transmitted_minThen sequentially transmitting more than 2 corrected minimum image plane movement coefficients K_{min_x}Such an operation is sufficient.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which theshake correction lens 34 is provided in thelens barrel 3 has been exemplified as the mechanism for correcting hand shake, but a configuration in which theimage pickup device 22 is movable in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis L1 may be adopted to perform hand shake correction.

Thecamera 1 of the above embodiment is not particularly limited, and the present invention may be applied to amirrorless camera 1a having a replaceable lens, as shown in fig. 24, for example. In the example shown in fig. 24, the camera body 2a sequentially transmits captured images captured by theimaging element 22 to thecamera control unit 21, and displays the images on an Electronic Viewfinder (EVF)26 of the observation optical system via a liquidcrystal drive circuit 25. In this case, thecamera control unit 21 can detect the focus adjustment state of the photographing optical system by the contrast detection method by reading the output of theimage pickup device 22, for example, and calculating the focus evaluation value based on the read output. The present invention can be applied to other optical devices such as a digital video camera, a lens-integrated digital camera, and a camera for a mobile phone.

EXAMPLE 12 EMBODIMENT (S)

Next,embodiment 12 of the present invention will be explained. Fig. 25 is a perspective view showing the single-lens reflexdigital camera 1 of the present embodiment. Fig. 26 is a main component configuration diagram showing thecamera 1 of the present embodiment. Thedigital camera 1 of the present embodiment (hereinafter, simply referred to as the camera 1) is composed of acamera body 2 and alens barrel 3, and thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 are detachably coupled to each other.

Thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is attachable to and detachable from thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 26, thelens barrel 3 incorporates a photographing opticalsystem including lenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 and adiaphragm 36.

Thelens 33 is a focusing lens, and can adjust the focal length of the photographing optical system by moving in the direction of the optical axis L1. Thefocus lens 33 is provided movably along the optical axis L1 of thelens barrel 3, and its position is adjusted by a focuslens driving motor 331 while being detected by anencoder 332 for the focus lens.

The focuslens driving motor 331 is, for example, an ultrasonic motor, and drives thefocus lens 33 based on an electric signal (pulse) output from thelens control unit 37. Specifically, the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 by the focuslens driving motor 331 is expressed in pulses/second, and the larger the number of pulses per unit time, the faster the driving speed of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thecamera control unit 21 of thecamera body 2 transmits the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) of thefocus lens 33 to thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 outputs a pulse signal corresponding to the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) transmitted from thecamera body 2 to the focuslens drive motor 331, thereby driving thefocus lens 33 at the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) transmitted from thecamera body 2.

Thelens 32 is a zoom lens, and can adjust the focal length of the photographing optical system by moving in the direction of the optical axis L1. Similarly to the above-describedfocus lens 33, thezoom lens 32 is also detected in position by thezoom lens encoder 322, and is adjusted in position by the zoomlens driving motor 321. The position of thezoom lens 32 is adjusted by operating a zoom button provided in theoperation unit 28 or by operating a zoom ring (not shown) provided in thelens barrel 3.

Thediaphragm 36 is configured to be able to adjust the aperture diameter around the optical axis L1 in order to regulate the light amount of the light beam that reaches theimage pickup device 22 through the photographing optical system and adjust the defocus amount. The aperture diameter of thediaphragm 36 is adjusted by, for example, sending an appropriate aperture diameter calculated in the automatic exposure mode from thecamera control unit 21 via thelens control unit 37. In addition, the set opening diameter is input from thecamera control section 21 to thelens control section 37 by manual operation of theoperation section 28 provided in thecamera body 2. The aperture diameter of thediaphragm 36 is detected by a diaphragm aperture sensor, not shown, and the current aperture diameter is recognized by thelens control unit 37.

Thelens memory 38 stores an image plane movement coefficient K. The image plane movement coefficient K is a value indicating a correspondence relationship between a driving amount of thefocus lens 33 and a movement amount of the image plane, and is, for example, a ratio of the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 to the movement amount of the image plane. The details of the image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 will be described later.

On the other hand, thecamera body 2 includes amirror system 220 for guiding a light flux from an object to theimage pickup device 22, theviewfinder 235, thephotometry sensor 237, and thefocus detection module 261. Themirror system 220 includes aquick return mirror 221 that rotates by a predetermined angle between an observation position and an imaging position of an object around arotation shaft 223, and a sub-mirror 222 that is axially supported by thequick return mirror 221 and rotates in accordance with the rotation of thequick return mirror 221. In fig. 26, a state in which themirror system 220 is at the observation position of the object is indicated by a solid line, and a state in which the mirror system is at the imaging position of the object is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Themirror system 220 is inserted on the optical path of the optical axis L1 in a state of being at the observation position of the object, and rotates so as to retreat from the optical path of the optical axis L1 in a state of being at the image pickup position of the object.

Thequick return mirror 221 is a half mirror, and in a state where it is at an observation position of the object, a part of the light flux (optical axes L2, L3) of the light flux (optical axis L1) from the object is reflected by thequick return mirror 221 and guided to thefinder 235 and thephotometry sensor 237, and a part of the light flux (optical axis L4) is transmitted and guided to the sub-mirror 222. On the other hand, the sub-mirror 222 is configured by a total reflection mirror, and guides the light beam (optical axis L4) transmitted through thequick return mirror 221 to thefocus detection module 261.

Therefore, with themirror system 220 in the observation position, the light flux from the object (optical axis L1) is guided to thefinder 235, thephotometry sensor 237, and thefocus detection module 261, the object is observed by the photographer, and exposure calculation, detection of the focus adjustment state of thefocus lens 33, is performed. Then, if the photographer presses the release button completely, themirror system 220 is rotated to the photographing position, the light flux from the subject (optical axis L1) is entirely guided to theimage pickup element 22, and the photographed image data is stored in thememory 24.

The light flux (optical axis L2) from the subject reflected by thequick return mirror 221 is imaged on thefocal plate 231 disposed on the surface optically equivalent to theimage pickup device 22, and can be observed through thepentaprism 233 and theeyepiece 234. At this time, the transmissiveliquid crystal display 232 displays a focus detection area mark or the like superimposed on the object image on thefocal plate 231, and displays information related to image capturing such as a shutter speed, an aperture value, and the number of images captured in an area outside the object image. In this way, the photographer can observe the subject, the background thereof, the shooting related information, and the like through theviewfinder 235 in the shooting preparation state.

Thephotometric sensor 237 is configured by a two-dimensional color CCD image sensor or the like, and divides a photographing screen into a plurality of regions to output photometric signals corresponding to the luminance of each region in order to calculate an exposure value at the time of photographing. A signal detected by thephotometry sensor 237 is output to thecamera control section 21 for automatic exposure control.

Theimage pickup device 22 is provided on a predetermined focal plane of a photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 on an optical axis L1 of a light flux from an object of thecamera body 2, and ashutter 23 is provided in front of the image pickup device. Theimage pickup device 22 has a plurality of photoelectric conversion elements arranged two-dimensionally, and may be configured by a two-dimensional CCD image sensor, a MOS sensor, a CID, or the like. The image signal photoelectrically converted by theimage pickup device 22 is subjected to image processing by thecamera control unit 21, and then recorded in thecamera memory 24 as a recording medium. Thecamera memory 24 may be any of a removable card memory and a built-in memory.

Thecamera control unit 21 also detects a focus adjustment state of the photographing optical system based on a contrast detection method (hereinafter, referred to as "contrast AF" as appropriate) based on the pixel data read from theimage pickup device 22. For example, thecamera control unit 21 reads the output of theimage pickup device 22, and calculates the focus evaluation value based on the read output. The focus evaluation value can be obtained by extracting a high-frequency component from the output of theimage pickup device 22 using a high-frequency transmission filter, for example. The high-frequency component can also be obtained by extracting the high-frequency component using two high-frequency transmission filters having different cutoff frequencies.

Thecamera control unit 21 performs focus detection based on the contrast detection method as follows: thelens control unit 37 is sent a drive signal to drive thefocus lens 33 at a predetermined sampling interval (distance), and the focus evaluation value at each position is obtained, and the position of thefocus lens 33 at which the focus evaluation value becomes the maximum is obtained as the in-focus position. For example, when the focus evaluation value is calculated while thefocus lens 33 is driven, and when the focus evaluation value changes two times in a rising manner and then two times in a falling manner, the focus position can be obtained by performing a calculation such as an interpolation method using the focus evaluation values.

In the focus detection by the contrast detection method, the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value increases as the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 increases, and when the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 exceeds a predetermined speed, the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value becomes excessively large, and the in-focus position cannot be appropriately detected. This is because the greater the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value, the greater the deviation of the focus position, and the lower the focus accuracy. Therefore, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 so that the moving speed of the image plane when thefocus lens 33 is driven becomes a speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected. For example, in the search control for driving thefocus lens 33 to detect the focus evaluation value, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 so as to achieve the maximum image plane driving speed among the image plane moving speeds at which the sampling interval of the in-focus position can be appropriately detected. The search control includes, for example, wobbling, a vicinity search (vicinity scan) of searching only the vicinity of a predetermined position, and a full-area search (full-area scan) of searching the full drive range of thefocus lens 33.

Thecamera control unit 21 may drive thefocus lens 33 at a high speed when the seek control is started with a half-press of the release switch as a trigger, and may drive thefocus lens 33 at a low speed when the seek control is started with a condition other than the half-press of the release switch as a trigger. This is because, by performing control in this way, contrast AF with a high speed can be performed when the release switch is half-pressed, and contrast AF with a favorable appearance of a preview image can be performed when the release switch is not half-pressed.

Further, thecamera control unit 21 may control thefocus lens 33 to be driven at a high speed in the search control in the still image shooting mode, and thefocus lens 33 to be driven at a low speed in the search control in the moving image shooting mode. This is because, by performing control in this way, contrast AF with a favorable appearance of moving images can be performed in the still image shooting mode at a high speed, and in the moving image shooting mode.

In at least one of the still image shooting mode and the moving image shooting mode, the contrast AF may be performed at a high speed in the moving image shooting mode, and at a low speed in the landscape image shooting mode. Further, the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 during the search control may be changed according to the focal length, the shooting distance, the aperture value, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, focus detection by the phase difference detection method can also be performed. Specifically, thecamera body 2 includes afocus detection module 261, and thefocus detection module 261 has a pair of line sensors (not shown) in which a plurality of pixels each including a microlens arranged in the vicinity of a predetermined focal plane of the imaging optical system and a photoelectric conversion element arranged for the microlens are arranged. Then, a pair of light beams passing through a pair of regions different in exit pupil of the focusinglens 33 are received by each pixel arranged in the pair of line sensors, whereby a pair of image signals can be acquired. Further, by obtaining the phase shift of the pair of image signals acquired by the pair of line sensors by a known correlation operation, focus detection by a phase difference detection method for detecting the focus adjustment state can be performed.

Theoperation unit 28 is an input switch for setting various operation modes of thecamera 1 by a photographer, such as a shutter release button or a moving image photographing start switch, and is capable of switching between a still image photographing mode and a moving image photographing mode and between an autofocus mode and a manual focus mode, and further capable of switching between an AF-S mode and an AF-F mode in the autofocus mode. The various modes set by theoperation unit 28 are transmitted to thecamera control unit 21, and the operation of theentire camera 1 is controlled by thecamera control unit 21. In addition, the shutter release button includes a 1 st switch SW1 turned on by half pressing the button and a 2 nd switch SW2 turned on by full pressing the button.

Here, the AF-S mode is a mode in which, in a case where the shutter release button is half-pressed, after thefocus lens 33 is driven according to the focus detection result, the position of thefocus lens 33 that has been adjusted once is fixed, and photographing is performed at the focus lens position. The AF-S mode is a mode suitable for still picture photography, and is normally selected when still picture photography is performed. The AF-F mode is a mode in which thefocus lens 33 is driven based on the focus detection result regardless of whether or not the shutter release button is operated, and thereafter, the focus state is repeatedly detected, and when the focus state changes, thefocus lens 33 is driven to scan. The AF-F mode is a mode suitable for moving image shooting, and is normally selected when moving image shooting is performed.

In the present embodiment, a switch for switching between the single-shot mode and the continuous shooting mode may be provided as the switch for switching between the autofocus modes. In this case, the AF-S mode can be set when the photographer selects the single-shot mode, and the AF-F mode can be set when the photographer selects the continuous shooting mode.

Next, the driving range of thefocus lens 33 will be described with reference to fig. 27.

As shown in fig. 27, the focusinglens 33 is configured to be movable in theinfinity direction 410 and theclose proximity direction 420 on an optical axis L1 indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure. A mechanical end point (mechanical end point) 430 in theinfinity direction 410 and amechanical end point 440 in theclose proximity direction 420 are provided with stoppers (not shown) to restrict the movement of thefocus lens 33. That is, the focusinglens 33 is configured to be movable from amechanical end point 430 in theinfinity direction 410 to amechanical end point 440 in theclose proximity direction 420.

However, the range in which thelens control section 37 actually drives thefocus lens 33 is smaller than the above-described range from themechanical end point 430 to themechanical end point 440. Specifically describing the movement range, thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 in a range from an infinitesoft limit position 450 provided inside amechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410 to a very closesoft limit position 460 provided inside amechanical end point 440 in the veryclose direction 420. That is, the lens driving section 212 drives thefocus lens 33 between the very closesoft limit position 460 corresponding to the position of the drive limit on the very close side and the infinitesoft limit position 450 corresponding to the position of the drive limit on the infinite side.

The infinitesoft limit position 450 is disposed to the outer side than theinfinite focus position 470. The infinity-side focusing position 470 is a position of the focusinglens 33 corresponding to the position on the infinity side where the photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 and thediaphragm 36 can focus. The reason why the infinitesoft limit position 450 is provided at such a position is that when focus detection by the contrast detection method is performed, there may be a peak of the focus evaluation value at theinfinite focus position 470. That is, if theinfinity focus position 470 and theinfinity limit position 450 are made to coincide, there is a problem that the peak of the focus evaluation value existing at theinfinity focus position 470 cannot be recognized as the peak, and in order to avoid such a problem, theinfinity limit position 450 is set to be located outside theinfinity focus position 470. Similarly, the very closesoft limit position 460 is set to the outer side than the very close in-focus position 480. Here, the very close focusingposition 480 is a position of the focusinglens 33 corresponding to a position closest to the side where the photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 and thediaphragm 36 can focus.

The veryclose focus position 480 can be set using, for example, aberration or the like. This is because, for example, even when focusing can be performed by driving thefocus lens 33 to the very near side of the set very nearfocus position 480, the use range of the lens is not suitable when aberration is deteriorated.

In the present embodiment, the position of thefocus lens 33 can be represented by, for example, the number of pulses of a drive signal supplied to the zoomlens drive motor 321, and in this case, the number of pulses can be set to the origin (reference) at theinfinity focus position 470. For example, in the example shown in fig. 27, the infinitesoft limit position 450 is a position of "-100 pulses", the veryclose focus position 480 is a position of "9800 pulses", and the very closesoft limit position 460 is a position of "9900 pulses". In this case, in order to move thefocus lens 33 from the infinitesoft limit position 450 to the very closesoft limit position 460, it is necessary to supply 10000 pulse-amount drive signals to the zoomlens drive motor 321. However, the present embodiment is not particularly limited to such an embodiment.

Next, the image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3 will be described.

The image plane movement coefficient K is a value indicating a correspondence relationship between a driving amount of thefocus lens 33 and a movement amount of the image plane, and is, for example, a ratio of the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 to the movement amount of the image plane. In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient is obtained by, for example, the following equation (2), and the smaller the image plane movement coefficient K is, the larger the amount of movement of the image plane accompanying the driving of thefocus lens 33 is.

Image plane shift coefficient K (driving amount offocus lens 33/shift amount of image plane) … (2)

In thecamera 1 of the present embodiment, even when the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 is the same, the amount of movement of the image plane differs depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33. Similarly, even when the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 is the same, the amount of movement of the image plane differs depending on the lens position of thezoom lens 32, that is, the focal length. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thefocus lens 33 and also the lens position in the optical axis direction of thezoom lens 32, and in the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 stores the image plane movement coefficient K for each lens position of thefocus lens 33 and each lens position of thezoom lens 32.

The image plane shift coefficient K can be defined as, for example, an image plane shift coefficient K (a shift amount of the image plane/a driving amount of the focus lens 33). In this case, the larger the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the amount of movement of the image plane accompanying the driving of thefocus lens 33.

Here, fig. 28 shows a table showing a relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement coefficient K. In the table shown in fig. 28, the drive region of thezoom lens 32 is divided into 9 regions "f 1" to "f 9" in order from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, and the drive region of thefocus lens 33 is divided into 9 regions "D1" to "D9" in order from the very near end to the infinity end, and image plane movement coefficients K corresponding to the respective lens positions are stored. Here, "D1" in the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is a predetermined region corresponding to the veryclose focus position 480 shown in fig. 27. For example, a predetermined region near the very close in-focus position 480 shown in fig. 27. "D9" is a predetermined region corresponding to theinfinity position 470 shown in fig. 27. For example, a predetermined area near theinfinity focus position 470 shown in fig. 27. In the table shown in fig. 28, for example, in the case where the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" and the lens position (photographing distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", the image plane movement coefficient K is "K11". The table shown in fig. 28 illustrates a form in which the driving region of each lens is divided into 9 regions, but the number is not particularly limited and can be set arbitrarily.

Next, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K will be described with reference to fig. 28_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe value is a value corresponding to the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficient K. For example, in fig. 28, when "K11" ═ 100 "," K12 "═ 200", "K13" ═ 300 "," K14 "═ 400", "K15" ═ 500 "," K16 "═ 600", "K17" ═ 700 "," K18 "═ 800", and "K19" ═ 900 ", the minimum value" K11 "═ 100" is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe maximum value "900" is "K19" which is the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTypically in accordance with the current lens position of thezoom lens 32. In addition, if the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is generally changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_minAlso a constant value (fixed value). I.e. the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe fixed value (constant value) determined in general in accordance with the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is a value independent of the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33.

Here, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K in "D1" in the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. That is, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near the veryclose focus position 480 including the veryclose focus position 480 shown in fig. 27 is set to the minimum imageCoefficient of plane movement K_minIn fig. 28, "K11", "K21", "K31", "K41", "K51", "K61", "K71", "K81" and "K91" shown in gray represent the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that represents the minimum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_min。

For example, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1", the image plane movement coefficient K when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", that is, "K11", becomes the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that represents the minimum value among "D1" to "D9"_min. Therefore, the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K11" to "K19" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" to "D9", and the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K11" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" represent the minimum value. Similarly, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 2", the image plane movement coefficient K, that is, "K21" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", among "K21" to "K29" when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "D1" to "D9", shows the minimum value. That is, "K21" is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. Hereinafter, similarly, when the lens positions (focal lengths) of thezoom lens 32 are "f 3" to "f 9", the "K31", "K41", "K51", "K61", "K71", "K81" and "K91" shown in gray are also the minimum image plane movement coefficients K_min。

In this way, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K in "D1" in the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. In particular, although the configuration of 31, 32, 33, and 35 constituting thelens barrel 3 is concerned, in the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven from the infinity side to the close side, the image plane shift coefficient K tends to be small, and the image plane shift coefficient K tends to be minimum at the close-focus position 480 shown in fig. 27. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "D1" will be used"the image plane movement coefficient K is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. However, according to the configuration of 31, 32, 33, 35 constituting thelens barrel 3, the image plane shift coefficient K may be minimized at theinfinity position 470 shown in fig. 27, and in such a case, the image plane shift coefficient K in "D9" may be set to the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_min。

Likewise, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe value is a value corresponding to the maximum value of the image plane movement coefficient K. Maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxTypically in accordance with the current lens position of thezoom lens 32. In addition, in general, if the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_maxAlso a constant value (fixed value).

Here, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K in "D9" in the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. That is, in the present embodiment, the image plane shift coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near theinfinity position 470 including theinfinity position 470 shown in fig. 27 is set to the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxIn fig. 28, "K19", "K29", "K39", "K49", "K59", "K69", "K79", "K89" and "K99" shown in hatched lines indicate the maximum image plane movement coefficient K indicating the maximum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_max。

As described above, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K in "D9" in the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. In particular, although the present embodiment also relates to the configurations of 31, 32, 33, and 35 constituting thelens barrel 3, when thefocus lens 33 is driven from the very near side to the infinity side, the image plane shift coefficient K tends to increase, and the image plane shift coefficient K tends to be the maximum at theinfinite focus position 470 shown in fig. 27. Therefore, in the present embodiment, will "The image plane movement coefficient K in D9' is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. However, depending on the configurations of 31, 32, 33, and 35 constituting thelens barrel 3, the image plane shift coefficient K may be maximized at the veryclose focus position 480 shown in fig. 27, and in such a case, the image plane shift coefficient K in "D1" may be set to the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_max。

As described above, as shown in fig. 27, thelens memory 38 stores the image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33, and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K indicating the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficients K for each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K indicating a maximum value of the image plane movement coefficients K for each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_max。

In addition, thelens memory 38 may replace the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that indicates the smallest value among the image plane movement coefficients K_minAnd will be the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMinimum image plane movement coefficient K of nearby values_min' stored into thelens memory 38. For example, the coefficient K is shifted at the minimum image plane_minWhen the value of (3) is a large number of digits such as 102.345, 100, which is a value near 102.345, can be stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min'. This is because when 100 (the minimum image plane movement coefficient K) is stored in the lens memory 38_min') and store 102.345 (minimum image plane movement coefficient K) in the lens memory 38_min) As compared with the case of (2), the memory capacity of the memory can be saved, and the capacity of the transmission data can be suppressed when transmitting to thecamera body 2.

In addition, for example, the coefficient K is shifted at the minimum image plane_minWhen the value of (d) is 100, 98, which is a value near 100, can be stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in consideration of the stability of control such as gap filling control, mute control (limiting operation), and lens speed control described later_min'. For example, in the case of considering stability of control, it is preferableIs selected at the actual value (minimum image plane movement coefficient K)_min) Set the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in the range of 80% -120%_min’。

Next, a method of communicating data between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 will be described.

Thecamera body 2 is provided with a body-side attachment portion 201 to which thelens barrel 3 is detachably attached. As shown in fig. 25, a connectingportion 202 protruding toward the inner surface side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 is provided in the vicinity of the body-side fitting portion 201 (on the inner surface side of the body-side fitting portion 201). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided in theconnection portion 202.

On the other hand, thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is detachable from thecamera body 2, and thelens barrel 3 is provided with a lens-side mount 301 that is detachably attached to thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 25, a connectingportion 302 protruding toward the inner surface side of the lens-sidefitting portion 301 is provided at a position near the lens-side fitting portion 301 (on the inner surface side of the lens-side fitting portion 301). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided at theconnection portion 302.

Also, if thelens barrel 3 is assembled to thecamera body 2, the electrical contact of theconnection portion 202 provided to the body-sidefitting portion 201 and the electrical contact of theconnection portion 302 provided to the lens-sidefitting portion 301 are electrically and physically connected. Thereby, the power supply from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 and the data communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 can be realized via theconnection portions 202 and 302.

Fig. 29 is a schematic diagram showing details of theconnection portions 202 and 302. Further, the connectingportion 202 is arranged on the right side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 in fig. 29, which simulates an actual fitting structure. That is, theconnection portion 202 of the present embodiment is disposed at a portion further to the rear side than the mounting surface of the body-side mounting portion 201 (a portion further to the right side than the body-side mounting portion 201 in fig. 29). Similarly, theconnection portion 302 is disposed on the right side of the lens-side mounting portion 301, which means that theconnection portion 302 of the present embodiment is disposed at a position protruding from the mounting surface of the lens-side mounting portion 301. By arranging theconnection portion 202 and theconnection portion 302 in the above manner, when the mounting surface of the body-side mounting portion 201 and the mounting surface of the lens-side mounting portion 301 are brought into contact to mount and couple themain body 2 and thelens barrel 3, theconnection portion 202 and theconnection portion 302 are connected, whereby the electrical contacts provided to both theconnection portions 202 and 302 are connected to each other.

As shown in fig. 29, 12 electrical contacts BP1 to BP12 are present in theconnection portion 202. Theconnection portion 302 on thelens 3 side has 12 electrical contacts LP1 to LP12 corresponding to the 12 electrical contacts on thecamera body 2 side.

The electrical contact BP1 and the electrical contact BP2 are connected to the 1 stpower supply circuit 230 in thecamera body 2. The 1 stpower supply circuit 230 supplies an operating voltage to each part (except for the relatively large power consumption circuits such as thelens drive motors 321 and 331) in thelens barrel 3 via the electrical contact BP1 and theelectrical contact LP 1. The voltage value supplied from the 1 stpower supply circuit 230 via the electrical contact BP1 and the electrical contact LP1 is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a voltage value of 3 to 4V (normally, a voltage value around 3.5V at the middle of the voltage width). In this case, the current value supplied from thecamera body side 2 to thelens barrel side 3 is a current value in the range of about several tens mA to several hundreds mA in the power on state. The electrical contacts BP2 and LP2 are ground terminals corresponding to the operating voltage supplied via the electrical contacts BP1 andLP 1.

The electric contacts BP3 to BP6 are connected to the camera-side 1st communication unit 291, and the electric contacts LP3 to LP6 are connected to the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 corresponding to the electric contacts BP3 to BP 6. The camera-side 1st communication unit 291 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 mutually transmit and receive signals by using these electrical contacts. The communication between the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 will be described in detail later.

Thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 is connected to the electrical contacts BP7 to BP10, and thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 is connected to the electrical contacts LP7 to LP10 corresponding to the electrical contacts BP7 to BP 10. Thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 and thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 transmit and receive signals to and from each other by these electrical contacts. The contents of communication performed by the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 and the lens-side 2nd communication unit 382 will be described in detail later.

The electrical contact BP11 and the electrical contact BP12 are connected to the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 in thecamera body 2. The 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 supplies an operating voltage to a circuit having relatively large power consumption, such as thelens drive motors 321 and 331, via the electrical contact BP11 and theelectrical contact LP 11. The voltage value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 is not particularly limited, and the maximum value of the voltage value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 may be about several times the maximum value of the voltage value supplied from the 1 stpower supply circuit 230. In this case, the current value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 to thelens barrel 3 side is a current value substantially in the range of several tens of mA to several a in the power on state. The electrical contacts BP12 and LP12 are ground terminals corresponding to the operating voltage supplied via the electrical contacts BP11 andLP 11.

The 1st communication unit 291 and the 2nd communication unit 292 on thecamera body 2 side shown in fig. 29 constitute the camera transmission/reception unit 29 shown in fig. 26, and the 1st communication unit 381 and the 2nd communication unit 382 on thelens barrel 3 side shown in fig. 29 constitute the lens transmission/reception unit 39 shown in fig. 26.

Next, communication (hereinafter, referred to as command data communication) between the camera-side 1st communication section 291 and the lens-side 1st communication section 381 will be described. Thelens control unit 37 performs command data communication in which transmission of control data from thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 to thelens side 1st communication unit 381 and transmission of response data from thelens side 1st communication unit 381 to thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 are performed in parallel at a predetermined cycle (for example, 16 msec intervals) via the signal line CLK including the electrical contacts BP3 and LP3, the signal line BDAT including the electrical contacts BP4 and LP4, the signal line LDAT including the electrical contacts BP5 and LP5, and the signal line RDY including the electrical contacts BP6 and LP 6.

Fig. 30 is a timing chart showing an example of command data communication. When thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 start command data communication (T1), first, the signal level of the signal line RDY is confirmed. Here, the signal level of the signal line RDY indicates whether or not communication is possible with thelens side 1st communication unit 381, and when communication is not possible, an H (high) level signal is output via thelens control unit 37 and thelens side 1st communication unit 381. The camera-side 1st communication unit 291 does not perform communication with thelens barrel 3 when the signal line RDY is at the H level, or does not perform the following processing when communication is in progress.

On the other hand, when the signal line RDY is at L (low) level, thecamera control section 21 and the camera-side 1st communication section 291 transmit theclock signal 501 to the lens-side 1st communication section 381 using the signal line CLK. In synchronization with theclock signal 501, thecamera control unit 21 and thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 transmit a camera sidecommand packet signal 502 as control data to thelens side 1st communication unit 381 using the signal line BDAT. Further, if theclock signal 501 is output, thelens control section 37 and thelens side 1st communication section 381 transmit the lens sidecommand packet signal 503 as response data using the signal line LDAT in synchronization with theclock signal 501.

Thelens control unit 37 and thelens side 1st communication unit 381 change the signal level of the signal line RDY from the L level to the H level in accordance with the completion of the transmission of the lens side command packet signal 503 (T2). Next, thelens control unit 37 starts the 1st control process 504 based on the content of the camera sidecommand packet signal 502 received before the time T2.

For example, in the case where the received camera-sidecommand packet signal 502 is a content requesting specific data on thelens barrel 3 side, as the 1st control processing 504, thelens control section 37 performs processing of parsing the content of thecommand packet signal 502 and generating the requested specific data. Furthermore, as the 1st control processing 504, thelens control section 37 also executes communication error check processing for simply checking whether or not an error exists in communication of thecommand packet signal 502 in accordance with the number of data bytes, using check sum data included in thecommand packet signal 502. The signal of the specific data generated in the 1st control processing 504 is output to thecamera body 2 side as a lens side packet signal 507 (T3). Further, in this case, the camera sidedata packet signal 506 output from thecamera body 2 side after thecommand packet signal 502 is dummy data (including checksum data) having no particular meaning to the lens side. In this case, as the 2nd control process 508, thelens control section 37 performs the communication error check process as described above using the check sum data contained in the camera side packet signal 506 (T4).

For example, when the camera-sidecommand packet signal 502 is a drive instruction of thefocus lens 33 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 506 is a drive speed and a drive amount of thefocus lens 33, thelens control unit 37 analyzes the content of thecommand packet signal 502 and generates a confirmation signal indicating that the content is understood as the 1 st control processing 504 (T2). The confirmation signal generated in the 1st control processing 504 is output to thecamera body 2 as a lens-side packet signal 507 (T3). In addition, as the 2 nd control processing 508, thelens control section 37 performs analysis of the content of the camera sidedata packet signal 506, and performs communication error check processing using check sum data included in the camera side data packet signal 506 (T4). Next, after the 2 nd control processing 508 is completed, thelens control section 37 drives the focuslens drive motor 331 based on the received cameraside packet signal 506, that is, the drive speed and the drive amount of thefocus lens 33, and drives thefocus lens 33 at the received drive speed and by the received drive amount (T5).

Further, when the 2 nd control processing 508 is completed, thelens control section 37 notifies thelens side 1st communication section 381 of the completion of the 2nd control processing 508. Thereby, thelens control section 37 outputs the L-level signal to the signal line RDY (T5).

The communication performed between the above-described times T1 to T5 is one command data communication. As described above, in the primary command data communication, thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 transmit the camera-sidecommand packet signal 502 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 506 one by one. In this way, in the present embodiment, for convenience of processing, the control data transmitted from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 is divided into two and transmitted, but the two of the camera-sidecommand packet signal 502 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 506 are combined to constitute one control data.

Similarly, in the primary command data communication, thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 transmit the lens-sidecommand packet signal 503 and the lens-sidedata packet signal 507 one by one. In this way, although the response data transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2 is also divided into two, the lens-sidecommand packet signal 503 and the lens-sidedata packet signal 507 are also combined into two pieces to constitute one response data.

Next, communication between thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 and thelens side 2 nd communication unit 382 (hereinafter, referred to as passive infrared communication) will be described. Returning to fig. 29, thelens control unit 37 performs hot-line communication in a cycle (for example, 1 millisecond interval) shorter than the command data communication by the signal line HREQ including the electrical contacts BP7 and LP7, the signal line HANS including the electrical contacts BP8 and LP8, the signal line HCLK including the electrical contacts BP9 and LP9, and the signal line HDAT including the electrical contacts BP10 and LP 10.

For example, in the present embodiment, the lens information of thelens barrel 3 is transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2 by hot-line communication. The lens information transmitted by the hot-wire communication includes the lens position of thefocus lens 33, the lens position of thezoom lens 32, and the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. Here, the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curThe image plane movement coefficient K is a coefficient corresponding to the current lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 can obtain the current position image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 by referring to the table indicating the relationship between the lens position (zoom lens position and focus lens position) and the image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38_cur. For example, in the example shown in fig. 28, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D4", thelens control unit 37 sets "K14" as the current value by hot-wire communication Front position image plane movement coefficient K_curAnd taking K11 as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd takes "K19" as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd sent to thecamera control section 21.

Here, fig. 31 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the hotline communication. Fig. 31(a) is a diagram showing a case where the hotline communication is repeatedly executed every predetermined cycle Tn. Fig. 31(b) shows a case where the period Tx of one of the repeatedly executed hot line communications is extended. Hereinafter, a case where the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is communicated by the hot-line communication will be described with reference to the timing chart of fig. 31 (b).

Thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 first output an L-level signal to the signal line HREQ to start communication by the hotline communication (T6). Next, thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 notifies thelens control unit 37 that the signal is input to the electrical contact LP 7. Thelens control unit 37 starts thegeneration processing 601 for generating the lens position data in response to the notification. Thegeneration processing 601 is processing in which thelens control unit 37 causes thefocus lens encoder 332 to detect the position of thefocus lens 33 and generates lens position data indicating the detection result.

If thelens control section 37 executes thecompletion generation processing 601, thelens control section 37 and the lens-side 2nd communication section 382 output a signal of L level to the signal line HANS (T7). When the signal is input to the electrical contact BP8, thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 output theclock signal 602 to the signal line HCLK from theelectrical contact BP 9.

In synchronization with thisclock signal 602, thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 2nd communication unit 382 output a lens position data signal 603 indicating lens position data to the signal line HDAT from the electrical contact LP 10. Next, when the transmission of the lens position data signal 603 is completed, thelens control section 37 and thelens side 2nd communication section 382 output a signal of H level from the electrical contact LP8 to the signal line HANS (T8). When the signal is input to the electrical contact BP8, thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 outputs an H-level signal to the signal line HREQ from the electrical contact LP7 (T9).

Further, command data communication and hotline communication can be performed simultaneously or in parallel.

Next, an operation example of thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing the operation of thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, the following operation is started by turning on the power of thecamera 1.

First, in step S1101, thecamera body 2 performs communication for identifying thelens barrel 3. This is because the communication format with which communication is possible differs depending on the type of the lens barrel. Then, the process proceeds to step S1102, and in step S1102, thecamera control unit 21 determines whether or not thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to a predetermined 1 st type of communication format. If it is determined as a result that the shot is a shot corresponding to thetype 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S1103. On the other hand, if thecamera control unit 21 determines that thelens barrel 3 is a lens not corresponding to thepredetermined type 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S1112. Further, thecamera control unit 21 may proceed to step S1112 when determining that thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to a 2 nd type communication format different from the 1 st type communication format. Further, when determining that thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to the 1 st and 2 nd communication formats, thecamera control unit 21 may proceed to step S1103.

Next, in step S1103, it is determined whether or not the live view photographing on/off switch provided in theoperation section 28 has been turned on by the photographer, and if the live view photographing is set on, themirror system 220 reaches the photographing position of the object, and the light flux from the object is guided to theimage pickup element 22.

In step S1104, hotline communication is started between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3. In the passive infrared communication, as described above, when thelens control unit 37 receives the L-level signal (request signal) output to the signal line HREQ by thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292, thelens control unit 21 transmits the lens information, and such transmission of the lens information is repeated. Further, the lens information includes, for example, the lens position of the focusing lens 33Lens position of thezoom lens 32, current position image plane shift coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxEach piece of information. The hotline communication is repeated after step S1104. The hot line communication is repeated until the power switch is turned off, for example. At this time, the image plane movement coefficient K is set with respect to the current position_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxPreferably, the image plane shift coefficient K is determined according to the current position_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAre transmitted in the order of (a).

When transmitting the lens information to thecamera control unit 21, thelens control unit 37 refers to a table (see fig. 28) stored in thelens memory 38 and indicating the relationship between each lens position and the image plane movement coefficient K, and acquires the current position image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position of thefocus lens 33_curAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32_maxAnd a minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe obtained current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTo thecamera control section 21.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the photographer has performed a half-press operation (turning on the 1 st switch SW 1) or an AF start operation on the release button provided in theoperation unit 28, and when these operations have been performed, the process proceeds to step S1106 (hereinafter, a case where the half-press operation has been performed will be described in detail).

Next, in step S1106, thecamera control unit 21 transmits a scan drive command (a scan drive start instruction) to thelens control unit 37 to perform focus detection by the contrast detection method. The scan drive command (the instruction of the drive speed or the instruction of the drive position during the scan drive) to thelens control unit 37 may be provided at the drive speed of thefocus lens 33, at the image plane movement speed, or at the target drive position.

Then, in step S1107, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the minimum image plane movement coefficient K obtained in step S1104_minA process of determining the scanning drive speed V, which is the drive speed of thefocus lens 33 during the scanning operation, is performed. Here, the scanning operation means the following operation: thefocus lens 33 is driven at the scanning drive speed V determined in this step S1107 by the focuslens drive motor 331, and the calculation of the focus evaluation value by the contrast detection method is simultaneously performed at predetermined intervals by thecamera control section 21, whereby the detection of the in-focus position by the contrast detection method is performed at predetermined intervals.

In this scanning operation, when detecting the in-focus position by the contrast detection method, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the focus evaluation value at predetermined sampling intervals while scanning and driving thefocus lens 33, and detects the lens position at which the calculated focus evaluation value reaches the peak as the in-focus position. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 calculates focus evaluation values on different image planes by moving the image plane based on the optical system in the optical axis direction by scanning and driving thefocus lens 33, and detects a lens position at which the focus evaluation values reach a peak as an in-focus position. On the other hand, if the moving speed of the image plane is set too fast, the interval between the image planes for calculating the focus evaluation value may become too large, and the in-focus position may not be detected properly. In particular, since the image plane movement coefficient K indicating the image plane movement amount with respect to the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 changes depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thefocus lens 33, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at a constant speed, depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, there are cases where: since the moving speed of the image plane is too fast, the interval between image planes for calculating the focus evaluation value becomes too large, and the in-focus position cannot be appropriately detected.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the minimum image plane movement coefficient K based on the minimum image plane movement coefficient K acquired in step S1104_minThe scanning driving speed V at the time of performing the scanning driving of thefocus lens 33 is calculated. Phase (C)Themachine control section 21 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe scanning drive speed V is calculated so as to be a drive speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected by the contrast detection method and which reaches the maximum drive speed.

Then, in step S1108, the scanning action is started at the scanning driving speed V determined in step S1107. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 sends a scan drive start command to thelens control unit 37, and thelens control unit 37 drives the focuslens drive motor 331 in accordance with the command from thecamera control unit 21, thereby scan-driving thefocus lens 33 at the scan drive speed V determined in step S1107. Then, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 at the scanning drive speed V, reads pixel outputs from image pickup pixels of theimage pickup device 22 at predetermined intervals, calculates a focus evaluation value based on the pixel outputs, obtains focus evaluation values at different focus lens positions, and detects a focus position by a contrast detection method.

Next, in step S1109, thecamera control section 21 determines whether or not the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected (whether or not the in-focus position can be detected). When the peak of the focus evaluation value cannot be detected, the process returns to step S1108, and the operations of steps S1108 and S1109 are repeated until the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected or thefocus lens 33 is driven to a predetermined driving end. On the other hand, when the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected, the process proceeds to step S1110.

When the peak value of the focus evaluation value can be detected, the process proceeds to step S1110, and in step S1110, thecamera control unit 21 transmits an instruction for driving in focus to a position corresponding to the peak value of the focus evaluation value to thelens control unit 37. Thelens control unit 37 controls the driving of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the received command.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1111, and in step S1111, thecamera control unit 21 determines that thefocus lens 33 has reached a position corresponding to the peak of the focus evaluation value, and performs still picture image capturing control when the photographer performs a full-press operation of the shutter release button (turning on the 2 nd switch SW 2). After the imaging control ends, the process returns to step S1104 again.

On the other hand, in step S1102, if it is determined that thelens barrel 3 is a lens not corresponding to thepredetermined type 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S1112, and the processes of steps S1112 to S1120 are executed. Further, in steps S1112 to S1120, the same processing as in steps S1103 to S1111 described above is performed except for the following two points: when the transmission of the lens information is repeatedly performed by the hotline communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3, the transmission does not include the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe information of (1) as lens information (step S1113); and replacing the minimum image plane movement coefficient K when determining the scanning driving speed V as the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 in the scanning operation_minOr correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And using the current position image plane movement coefficient K contained in the lens information_curThis point (step S1116).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K, which is the smallest image plane movement coefficient among the image plane movement coefficients K stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3, is used_minThe scanning drive speed V is calculated so that the scanning drive speed V becomes the maximum drive speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected by the contrast detection method, and therefore, even when thefocus lens 33 is driven to scan until the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the minimum value (for example, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained)_minThe same value), the calculation interval of the focus evaluation values (the interval of the image planes on which the focus evaluation values are calculated) can be set to a size suitable for focus detection. Thus, according to the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven in the optical axis direction, even when the image plane movement coefficient K changes and the final image plane movement coefficient K becomes small (for example, when the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set to be the image plane movement coefficient K)_minIn the case of (2), the detection of the focused position by the contrast detection method can be appropriately performed.

EXAMPLE 13 embodiment

Next,embodiment 13 of the present invention will be explained. Inembodiment 13, in thecamera 1 shown in fig. 25, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K among the image plane movement coefficients K stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxExcept for the difference in setting method, the same configuration as in the above-describedembodiment 12 is provided, and the same operation and effects are obtained by the same operation.

In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is set so that the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the minimum value when thefocus lens 33 is driven to the vicinity of the very closesoft limit position 460. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K is set so that the image plane movement coefficient K when driven to the vicinity of the extremely closesoft limit position 460 is a minimum value as compared with when thefocus lens 33 is moved to any position between the extremely closesoft limit position 460 and the infinitesoft limit position 450.

Similarly, the image plane movement coefficient K is set so that the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the maximum value when thefocus lens 33 is driven to the vicinity of the infinitesoft limit position 450. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K is set so that the image plane movement coefficient K when driving to the vicinity of the infinitesoft limit position 450 is a maximum value as compared with when moving thefocus lens 33 to any position between the extremely closesoft limit position 460 and the infinitesoft limit position 450.

That is, with respect to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minIn the above-describedembodiment 12, the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near the veryclose focus position 480 including the veryclose focus position 480 is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minHowever, inembodiment 13, the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near the very closesoft limit position 460 including the very closesoft limit position 460 is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min。

Here, fig. 33 shows a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used inembodiment 13 and the image plane movement coefficient K. That is to say that the first and second electrodes, Inembodiment 13, the image plane movement coefficient K in the region "D0" which is a region on the very near side of the region indicated by "D1" including the very near in-focus position 480 shown in fig. 27 is set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. In the present embodiment, "D0" in the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is a predetermined region corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460 shown in fig. 27. For example, a predetermined region near the very nearsoft limit position 460 shown in fig. 27. "D10" is a predetermined area corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450 shown in fig. 27. For example, a predetermined region near the infinitesoft limit position 450 shown in fig. 27. In fig. 33, "K10", "K20", "K30", "K40", "K50", "K60", "K70", "K80" and "K90" shown in gray represent the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that represents the minimum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_min。

Similarly, regarding the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIn the above-describedembodiment 12, the image plane shift coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near theinfinity position 470 including theinfinity position 470 is set to the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxHowever, inembodiment 13, the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near the infinitesoft limit position 450 including the infinitesoft limit position 450 is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. That is, inembodiment 13, the image plane movement coefficient K in the "D10" which is an area on the infinity side from the area indicated by "D9" including theinfinity position 470 shown in fig. 27 is set as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. In fig. 33, "K110", "K210", "K310", "K410", "K510", "K610", "K710", "K810", and "K910" shown by hatching indicate the maximum image plane movement coefficient K indicating the maximum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_max。

Alternatively, inembodiment 13, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set_minMay also be, instead ofThe image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near the very nearsoft limit position 460 including the very nearsoft limit position 460, and the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near themechanical end point 440 including themechanical end point 440 in the verynear direction 420 is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd stored in thelens memory 38.

Further, inembodiment 13, the maximum image plane shift coefficient K is set to_maxInstead of the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near the infinitesoft limit position 450 including the infinitesoft limit position 450, the image plane movement coefficient K in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven near themechanical end point 430 including themechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410 may be set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd stored in thelens memory 38.

EXAMPLE 14 best mode for carrying out the invention

Next,embodiment 14 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 14 has the same configuration asembodiment 12 described above, except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 25 operates as described below.

That is, the 14 th embodiment is different from the 12 th embodiment as follows except that: that is, in the above-describedembodiment 12, in the flowchart shown in fig. 32, in step S1103, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that is not transmitted_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd transmits the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}As lens information.

Here, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is corrected_{min_x}By applying a minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minCorrected to obtain and value ratio minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minSmall image plane shift coefficient, e.g. by applying minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minAnd an image plane movement coefficient calculated by multiplying the image plane movement coefficient by a constant α 1 (for example, 0.9 or the like) smaller than 1. Likewise, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is corrected_{max_x}By applying a maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCorrected to obtain and value ratio maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxLarge image plane shift coefficient, e.g. by applying maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxAnd an image plane movement coefficient calculated by multiplying the image plane movement coefficient by a constant α 2 (for example, 1.1 or the like) larger than 1.

In the 14 th embodiment, in the flowchart shown in fig. 32, when the process of determining the scanning drive speed V, which is the drive speed of thefocus lens 33 during the scanning operation, is executed in step S1106, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is replaced with the image plane movement coefficient K_minUsing the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}To determine the scanning driving speed V. In particular, inembodiment 14, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is replaced_minAnd correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K using a smaller value_{min_x}Accordingly, when the scanning drive speed V is determined, a margin of safety can be set, and thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent a problem that the moving speed of the image plane is too high to appropriately detect the in-focus position when the focus detection is performed by the contrast detection method.

Further, as the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}The pre-calculated coefficient may be stored in thelens memory 38 and used, or the calculation of the correction minimum image plane movement coefficient K may be appropriately set according to the imaging conditions and the like_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}The time constants α 1 andα 2 are calculated for each process. Inembodiment 14, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained as the correction_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}Illustrating the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe method of multiplying thepredetermined constants α 1 andα 2 is not particularly limited.

Further, inembodiment 14, the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K is transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image Coefficient of plane movement K_{max_x}In this case, the image plane movement coefficient K can be set to be equal to the uncorrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe transmission is performed in the same manner. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K can be transmitted in such a manner that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is actually transmitted and corrected_{min_x}And correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_{max_x}While at the same time being recognized in thecamera body 2 as an uncorrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThis can simplify the processing in thecamera body 2.

EXAMPLE 15 th embodiment

Next,embodiment 15 of the present invention will be explained. The 15 th embodiment has the same configuration as the 12 th embodiment described above, except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 25 operates as described below.

That is, the 15 th embodiment is different from the 12 th embodiment in the point that the 12 th embodiment is different from the 12 th embodiment in the above-described point that, in the flowchart shown in fig. 31, when the in-focus position can be detected by the contrast detection method in step S1109, it is determined whether or not the gap filling driving is performed when the focus driving is performed based on the result of the contrast detection method in step S1110, and the driving form of thefocus lens 33 when the focus driving is performed is made different based on the determination.

That is, the focuslens driving motor 331 for driving thefocus lens 33 shown in fig. 25 is generally configured by a mechanical drive transmission mechanism, and such a drive transmission mechanism is configured by the 1st drive mechanism 500 and the 2nd drive mechanism 600 as shown in fig. 34, for example, and has the following configuration: by driving the 1st drive mechanism 500, the 2nd drive mechanism 600 on the focusinglens 33 side is driven along with this, whereby the focusinglens 33 is moved to the very near side or the infinite side. In such a drive mechanism, the gap amount G is usually provided in view of smooth operation of the meshing portion of the gears. On the other hand, in the contrast detection method, in this mechanism, as shown in fig. 35(a) and 35(B), thefocus lens 33 needs to be driven to the in-focus position by reversing the driving direction after passing through the in-focus position once by the scanning operation. In this case, when the gap filling drive is not performed as shown in fig. 35(B), there is a characteristic that the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is shifted from the in-focus position by the gap amount G. Therefore, in order to eliminate the influence of the gap amount G, as shown in fig. 35(a), when thefocus lens 33 is driven to focus, it is necessary to perform gap filling driving in which the driving direction is again reversed and the lens is driven to the focus position after passing through the focus position once.

Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the focus lens position and the focus evaluation value and the relationship between the focus lens position and time when the scanning operation and the focus drive by the contrast detection method of the present embodiment are performed. Fig. 35(a) shows the following configuration: at time t₀Next, the scanning operation of thefocus lens 33 is started from the infinity side to the close side from the lens position P0, and thereafter, at time t₁Next, at the time point when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the lens position P1, if the peak position (focus position) P2 of the focus evaluation value is detected, the scanning operation is stopped, and focus driving is performed in association with the gap filling driving, and thereby, at the time t₂Next, thefocus lens 33 is driven to the in-focus position. On the other hand, fig. 35(B) shows the following form: likewise, at time t₀Next, after the scanning action is started, at time t₁Then, the scanning operation is stopped, and the focusing drive is performed without the gap filling drive, so that the scanning operation is performed at time t₃Next, thefocus lens 33 is driven to the in-focus position.

Next, an operation example inembodiment 15 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in fig. 36. In the flowchart shown in fig. 31, when the in-focus position is detected by the contrast detection method in step S1109, the following operation is performed. That is, as shown in fig. 35(a) and 35(B), from time t₀Starting a scanning operation at time t₁Next, when the peak position of the focus evaluation value is detected at the time point when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the lens position P1(s) ((s))In-focus position) P2, at time t₁Is performed at the time point of (a).

That is, when the in-focus position is detected by the contrast detection method, first, in step S1201, thecamera control unit 21 acquires the minimum image plane movement coefficient K at the current lens position of thezoom lens 32_min. Further, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe infrared communication performed between thecamera control unit 21 and thelens control unit 37 can be obtained from thelens control unit 37 via the lens transmitting/receivingunit 39 and the camera transmitting/receivingunit 29.

Next, in step S1202, thecamera control unit 21 acquires information on the gap amount G (see fig. 34) of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33. The gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 can be acquired by storing it in alens memory 38 provided in thelens barrel 3 in advance, for example, and referring to it. Specifically, the following can be obtained: thecamera control unit 21 transmits a request for transmission of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 to thelens control unit 37 via the camera transmission/reception unit 29 and the lens transmission/reception unit 39, and causes thelens control unit 37 to transmit information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 stored in thelens memory 38. Alternatively, the following configuration may be adopted: the lens information transmitted and received by the above-described hotline communication between thecamera control unit 21 and thelens control unit 37 includes information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 stored in thelens memory 38.

Next, in step S1203, thecamera control unit 21 sets the minimum image plane movement coefficient K obtained in step S1201 described above as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd the information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 acquired in the above-described step S1202, and calculates the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G_G. Further, an image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G_GThe movement amount of the image plane when the focus lens is driven by the same amount as the gap amount G is calculated according to the following equation in the present embodiment.

Image plane movement amount I corresponding to gap amount G_GGap amount G × minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min

Next, in step S1204, thecamera control unit 21 performs the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G calculated in step S1203 above_GAnd a predetermined image plane movement amount I_PA comparison process is performed, and as a result of the comparison, the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G is determined_GWhether or not it is a predetermined image plane movement amount I_PHereinafter, the "image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G" is determined_GA predetermined image plane movement amount I ≦_PWhether or not "is true. In addition, the predetermined image plane movement amount I_PThe image plane movement amount is set in accordance with the focal depth of the optical system, and is usually set in accordance with the focal depth. In addition, the predetermined image plane movement amount I_PSince the focal depth of the optical system is set, the focal depth can be set appropriately according to the F value, the cell size of theimaging device 22, and the format of the captured image. That is, the predetermined image plane movement amount I can be set to be larger as the F value is larger_PThe larger. Alternatively, the image plane movement amount I can be set to be predetermined as the unit size of theimage pickup device 22 is larger or the image format is smaller_PThe larger. Then, the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G_GFor a predetermined image plane movement amount I_PIn the following case, the process proceeds to step S1205. On the other hand, the amount of image surface movement I corresponding to the gap amount G_GGreater than a predetermined image plane movement amount I_PIn this case, the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1205, it is determined in step S1204 that the image plane movement amount I corresponds to the gap amount G_GFor a predetermined image plane movement amount I_PIn this case, it is determined that the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 is within the depth of focus of the optical system even when the gap filling drive is not performed, and it is determined that the gap filling drive is not performed during the focus drive. That is, it is determined to directly drive thefocus lens 33 to the pair when performing the focus drive Based on this determination, as shown in fig. 35(B), the focus driving is performed without the gap filling driving.

On the other hand, in step S1206, it is determined in step S1204 that the image plane movement amount I corresponds to the gap amount G_GGreater than a predetermined image plane movement amount I_PTherefore, in this case, it is determined that the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 cannot be brought within the depth of focus of the optical system if the gap filling drive is not performed, and it is determined that the gap filling drive is performed during the focus drive, and based on the determination, the focus drive accompanied by the gap filling drive is performed. That is, when thefocus lens 33 is driven to perform focus driving, the focus lens passes through the focus position once and then is driven to the focus position by performing reverse driving again, and based on this determination, as shown in fig. 35(a), focus driving accompanied by gap filling driving is performed.

In the 15 th embodiment, as described above, the gap filling control is performed in accordance with the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd information on the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33, and calculates the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G_GDetermining the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the calculated gap amount G_GWhether or not the image plane movement amount is a predetermined image plane movement amount I corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system_PThereafter, it is determined whether or not the gap filling drive is executed when the focus drive is performed. Then, as a result of the determination, the amount of image shift I corresponding to the gap amount G is set_GFor a predetermined image plane movement amount I corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system_PWhen the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 can be set within the depth of focus of the optical system as follows, the gap filling drive is not performed, and the image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G is set_GGreater than a predetermined image plane movement amount I corresponding to a focal depth of the optical system_POn the other hand, if the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 cannot be within the depth of focus of the optical system without performing the gap filling drive, the gap filling drive is performed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the gap filling drive is not required, the gap filling drive is not performedBy performing the gap filling drive, the time required for the focusing drive can be shortened, and thus the time for the focusing operation can be shortened. On the other hand, when the gap filling drive is required, the gap filling drive can be performed to obtain a good focusing accuracy.

In particular, inembodiment 15, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_minAnd calculates an image plane movement amount I corresponding to the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33_GIt is compared with a predetermined image plane movement amount I corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system_PBy performing the comparison, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gap filling drive at the time of focusing is required.

In the gap filling control according toembodiment 15 described above, thecamera control unit 21 may determine whether or not gap filling is necessary based on the focal length, the aperture, and the object distance. Thecamera control unit 21 may change the driving amount of the gap filling according to the focal length, the aperture, and the object distance. For example, in the case where the aperture is reduced to be smaller than the predetermined value (the F value is large), it may be determined that gap filling is not necessary or that the driving amount of gap filling is controlled to be reduced, as compared with the case where the aperture is not reduced to be smaller than the predetermined value (the F value is small). Further, for example, it may be determined that gap filling is not necessary or controlled so that the driving amount of gap filling is reduced on the wide angle side as compared with the telephoto side.

EXAMPLE 16 th embodiment

Next,embodiment 16 of the present invention will be explained. The 16 th embodiment has the same configuration as the 12 th embodiment described above, except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 25 operates as described below.

That is, inembodiment 16, the limiting operation (mute control) described below is performed. Inembodiment 16, the movement speed of the image plane of thefocus lens 33 is controlled to be constant in the search control based on the contrast detection method, while the limiting operation for suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 is performed in the search control based on the contrast detection method. Here, the limiting operation performed inembodiment 16 is an operation of limiting the speed of thefocus lens 33 so as not to fall below the mute lower limit lens movement speed when the speed of thefocus lens 33 becomes slow and muting is hindered.

Inembodiment 16, as will be described later, thecamera control unit 21 of thecamera body 2 compares the predetermined mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b with the focus lens driving speed V1a by using a predetermined coefficient (Kc) to determine whether or not the limiting operation should be performed.

When thecamera control unit 21 permits the limiting operation, thelens control unit 37 limits the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b in order to avoid the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33, which will be described later, from falling below the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b. The following is a detailed description with reference to the flowchart shown in fig. 37. Here, fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation (mute control) according toembodiment 16.

In step S1301, thelens control unit 37 acquires the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. The mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control unit 37 can acquire the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b from thelens memory 38.

In step S1302, thelens control unit 37 acquires a drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 can acquire the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 by transmitting the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 to thelens control unit 37 by command data communication.

In step S1303, thelens control unit 37 compares the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b acquired in step S1301 with the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 acquired in step S1302. Specifically, thelens control unit 37 determines whether or not the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec), and proceeds to step S1304 when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed, and proceeds to step S1305 when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

In step S1304, it is determined that the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In this case, thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b in order to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33. In this way, when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, thelens control unit 37 limits the lens drive speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

On the other hand, in step S1305, it is determined that the driving instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2 is equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In this case, since the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 of a predetermined value or more is not generated (or the driving sound is extremely small), thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 at the speed instructed to drive thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2.

Here, fig. 38 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and is a diagram in which the vertical axis is the lens driving speed and the horizontal axis is the image plane movement coefficient K. As shown in the horizontal axis of fig. 38, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, and in the example shown in fig. 38, the image plane movement coefficient K tends to be smaller toward the very near side and larger toward the infinity side. In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the focus detection operation is performed, thefocus lens 33 is driven at a constant speed of the movement speed of the image plane, and therefore, as shown in fig. 38, the actual driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 changes depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33. That is, in the example shown in fig. 38, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at a speed at which the moving speed of the image plane is constant, the lens moving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is slower on the very near side and faster on the infinity side.

On the other hand, as shown in fig. 38, in the case of driving thefocus lens 33, if the image plane movement speed in such a case is shown, it is constant as shown in fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max due to the driving of thefocus lens 33, and is a diagram in which the vertical axis is the image plane movement speed and the horizontal axis is the image plane movement coefficient K. In fig. 38 and 40, the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement speed by the driving of thefocus lens 33 are both indicated by V1 a. Therefore, V1a is variable (not parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the figure is the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 as shown in fig. 38, and is constant (parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the figure is the image plane moving speed as shown in fig. 40.

Further, when thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the moving speed of the image plane is constant, if the limiting operation is not performed, the lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 may be lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b as in the example shown in fig. 38. For example, when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K can be obtained_minThe position of the focus lens 33 (in fig. 38, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K)_min100), the lens moving speed V1a is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

In particular, when the focal length of thelens barrel 3 is long and the light environment is bright, the lens movement speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 tends to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In such a case, as shown in fig. 38, thelens control unit 37 performs the limiting operation to limit the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (so as to be controlled not to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b) (step S1304), thereby suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33.

Next, referring to fig. 39, a limiting operation control process for determining whether to permit or prohibit the limiting operation shown in fig. 37 will be described. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation control processing of the present embodiment. The operation limiting control processing described below is executed by thecamera body 2 when, for example, the AF-F mode or the moving image capturing mode is set.

First, in step S1401, thecamera control unit 21 acquires lens information. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 acquires the current image plane movement coefficient K from thelens barrel 3 by hot-line communication_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

Next, in step S1402, thecamera control unit 21 calculates a mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max. The image plane movement speed V0b _ max at the lower limit of mute is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane moving speed when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the above-described mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b is set to the position of thefocus lens 33. The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max will be described in detail below.

First, as shown in fig. 38, it is determined whether or not a driving sound is generated due to the driving of thefocus lens 33 based on the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33, and therefore, as shown in fig. 38, the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b is a constant speed when expressed by the lens driving speed. On the other hand, if the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is expressed by the image plane movement speed, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33 as described above, and thus is variable as shown in fig. 40. In fig. 38 and 40, the mute lower limit lens movement speed (the lower limit value of the actual driving speed of the focus lens 33) and the image plane movement speed when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed are both indicated by V0 b. Therefore, V0b is constant (parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 as shown in fig. 38, and variable (not parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the image plane moving speed as shown in fig. 40.

In the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the image plane movement speed is constant, the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is set so that the minimum image plane movement can be obtainedCoefficient of motion K_minThe movement speed of thefocus lens 33 at the position of the focus lens 33 (in the example shown in fig. 40, the image plane movement coefficient K is 100) is the image plane movement speed at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. That is, in the present embodiment, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed, the image plane movement speed that reaches the maximum (in the example shown in fig. 40, the image plane movement coefficient K is 100, or less) is set to the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the maximum image plane movement speed (the image plane movement speed at the lens position at which the image plane movement coefficient becomes minimum) among the image plane movement speeds corresponding to the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, which vary depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, is calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max. For example, in the example shown in fig. 40, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTo "100", the image plane movement speed at the lens position of thefocus lens 33 whose image plane movement coefficient is "100" is therefore calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max.

Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 uses the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec) and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K as shown in the following expression_min(unit: pulse/mm), the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) is calculated.

The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is equal to the mute lower limit lens movement speed (actual driving speed of the focus lens) V0 b/the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min

Thus, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_minThe mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated, so that the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max can be calculated at the timing of starting the focus detection or the motion picture photography by the AF-F. For example, in the example shown in fig. 40, when focus detection or moving image shooting by AF-F is started at the timing t 1', the image plane movement speed at the lens position of thefocus lens 33 at which the image plane movement coefficient K is "100" can be calculated as the image plane movement speed at the lower limit of silence at the timing t1The moving speed V0b _ max.

Next, in step S1403, thecamera control unit 21 compares the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection acquired in step S1401 with the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max calculated in step S1402. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 determines whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a (unit: mm/sec) for focus detection and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) satisfy the following expression.

(image plane moving speed V1a XKc for focus detection) > mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0b _ max

In the above expression, the coefficient Kc is a value of 1 or more (Kc ≧ 1), and details thereof will be described later.

If the above expression is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1404, and thecamera control unit 21 allows the restricting operation shown in fig. 37. That is, in order to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33, as shown in fig. 38, the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is limited to the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b (seek control is performed so that the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is not lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b).

On the other hand, if the above equation is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1405, and the restricting operation shown in fig. 37 is prohibited. That is, in a case where the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is not limited by the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is allowed to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b), thefocus lens 33 is driven at the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected.

Here, as shown in fig. 38, if the limiting operation is allowed and the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the movement speed of the image plane becomes faster at a lens position where the image plane movement coefficient K is small, and as a result, the movement speed of the image plane becomes faster than the image plane movement speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, and appropriate in-focus accuracy may not be obtained. On the other hand, when the limiting operation is prohibited and thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the moving speed of the image plane becomes the image plane moving speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, as shown in fig. 38, there is a case where the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b and a driving sound of a predetermined value or more is generated.

As described above, when the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection is lower than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, it may be a problem that thefocus lens 33 is driven at a lens driving speed lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b so as to obtain the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, or that thefocus lens 33 is driven at a lens driving speed equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b so as to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the above expression is satisfied even when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the coefficient Kc in the above expression is stored in advance as a value of 1 or more that can ensure a certain focus detection accuracy. Thus, as shown in fig. 40, when the above expression is satisfied even when the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection is lower than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, thecamera control unit 21 determines that a certain focus detection accuracy can be secured, preferentially suppresses the driving sound of thefocus lens 33, and permits the limiting operation of driving thefocus lens 33 at a lens driving speed lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

On the other hand, if the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is assumed to be equal to or less than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, if the limiting operation is permitted and the drive speed of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the image plane movement speed for focus detection may be too high to ensure the focus detection accuracy. Therefore, when the above expression is not satisfied, thecamera control unit 21 prioritizes the focus detection accuracy and prohibits the limiting operation shown in fig. 37. Thus, the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected can be set as the image plane movement speed at the time of focus detection, and focus detection can be performed with high accuracy.

Further, when the aperture value is large (the aperture opening is small), the depth of field becomes deep, and therefore the sampling interval at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected becomes wide. As a result, the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected can be increased. Therefore, when the image plane moving speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected is a fixed value, thecamera control unit 21 can increase the coefficient Kc of the above expression as the aperture value increases.

Similarly, in the case where the image size of a live view image or the like is small (the case where the compression rate of the image is high or the thinning rate of pixel data is high), since high focus detection accuracy is not required, the coefficient Kc of the above expression can be increased. In addition, the coefficient Kc of the above equation can be increased even when the pixel pitch in theimage sensor 22 is large.

Next, the control of the restricting operation will be described in more detail with reference to fig. 41 and 42. Fig. 41 is a diagram showing a relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the limiting operation at the time of focus detection, and fig. 42 is a diagram for explaining a relationship between the actual lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 and the limiting operation.

For example, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the search control is started with the half-press of the release switch as a trigger and when the search control is started with a condition other than the half-press of the release switch as a trigger, the moving speed of the image plane in the search control may be different depending on the still image shooting mode and the moving image shooting mode, the moving image shooting mode and the landscape shooting mode, or the focal length, the shooting distance, the aperture value, and the like. In fig. 41, such different moving speeds V1a _1, V1a _2, V1a _3 of 3 image planes are illustrated.

Specifically, the image plane moving speed V1a _1 at the time of focus detection shown in fig. 41 is the maximum moving speed among the moving speeds of the image plane in which the focus state can be appropriately detected, and is the moving speed of the image plane satisfying the relationship of the above expression. The image plane movement speed V1a _2 at the time of focus detection is slower than the image plane movement speed V1a _1, but is the image plane movement speed satisfying the relationship of the above expression at timing t 1'. On the other hand, the image plane movement speed V1a _3 at the time of focus detection is a movement speed of the image plane that does not satisfy the relationship of the above expression.

In this way, in the example shown in fig. 41, when the moving speed of the image plane at the time of focus detection is V1a _1 and V1a _2, the relationship of the above expression is satisfied at the timing t1, and therefore the restricting operation shown in fig. 41 is permitted. On the other hand, when the moving speed of the image plane at the time of focus detection is V1a _3, the relationship of the above expression is not satisfied, and therefore the restricting operation shown in fig. 37 is prohibited.

This point will be specifically described with reference to fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a view showing the vertical axis of the graph shown in fig. 41 changed from the image plane movement speed to the lens driving speed. As described above, the lens driving speed V1a _1 of thefocus lens 33 satisfies the relationship of the above expression, and therefore allows the restricting operation. However, as shown in fig. 42, even at a lens position where the minimum image plane movement coefficient (K is 100) can be obtained, the lens driving speed V1a _1 does not fall below the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and therefore, the limiting operation is not actually performed.

Further, since the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 also satisfies the relationship of the above equation at the timing t 1' that is the start timing of the focus detection, the restricting operation is allowed. In the example shown in fig. 42, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the lens driving speed V1a _2, the lens driving speed V1a _2 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is K1, and therefore the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 is limited at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is smaller than K1 at the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

That is, by performing the limiting operation at the lens position where the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the movement speed V1a _2 of the image plane at the time of focus detection is subjected to the search control of the focus evaluation value at a movement speed of the image plane different from the movement speed (search speed) of the image plane immediately before the image plane. That is, as shown in fig. 41, at the lens position where the image plane movement coefficient is smaller than K1, the movement speed V1a — 2 of the image plane at the time of focus detection is a speed different from the constant speed immediately before.

Further, since the lens driving speed V1a _3 of thefocus lens 33 does not satisfy the relationship of the above expression, the restricting operation is prohibited. Therefore, in the example shown in fig. 42, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the lens driving speed V1a _3, the lens driving speed V1a _3 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is K2, but the restricting operation is not performed at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K smaller than K2 can be obtained, and the restricting operation is not performed even if the driving speed V1a _3 of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b in order to appropriately detect the focus state.

As described above, inembodiment 16, the maximum image plane movement speed among the image plane movement speeds in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, and the calculated mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is compared with the image plane movement speed V1a at the time of focus detection. When the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is higher than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, it is determined that focus detection accuracy equal to or higher than a certain level can be obtained even when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and the limiting operation shown in fig. 37 is permitted. Thus, in the present embodiment, the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 can be suppressed while ensuring the focus detection accuracy.

On the other hand, when the drive speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is equal to or less than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, there is a case where appropriate focus detection accuracy cannot be obtained. Therefore, in this embodiment, the limiting operation shown in fig. 37 is prohibited in order to obtain an image plane moving speed suitable for focus detection. Thus, in the present embodiment, the in-focus position can be appropriately detected at the time of focus detection.

In the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in advance in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minUsing the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in fig. 35, for example, at the timing t1 when moving image shooting is started or focus detection is performed in the AF-F mode, it is possible to determine whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) for focus detection exceeds the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max, and determine whether or not the limiting operation is performed. In this way, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is not used at the current position_curThe minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be used by repeatedly determining whether to perform the limiting operation_minSince it is determined whether or not the limiting operation is performed at the first timing of starting the moving image capturing or the focus detection in the AF-F mode, the processing load of thecamera body 2 can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the restricted operation control process shown in fig. 37 is executed in thecamera body 2 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the restricted operation control process shown in fig. 37 may be executed in thelens barrel 3.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the image plane movement coefficient K is calculated by the image plane movement coefficient K (the driving amount of thefocus lens 33/the movement amount of the image plane) is exemplified as shown in the above expression, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a configuration in which the calculation is performed as shown in the following expression may be adopted.

Image plane shift coefficient K ═ (amount of shift of image plane/amount of drive of focus lens 33)

Further, in this case, thecamera control section 21 can calculate the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max as follows. That is, as shown in the following equation, thecamera control unit 21 can determine the maximum image plane movement coefficient K that indicates the maximum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32, and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec)_max(unit: pulse/mm), calculating mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0bMax (unit: mm/sec).

The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is equal to the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b/maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max

For example, in the case of adopting a value calculated by "the movement amount of the image plane/the driving amount of thefocus lens 33" as the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the value (absolute value), the larger the movement amount of the image plane in the case of driving the focus lens by a predetermined value (e.g., 1 mm). In the case of adopting a value calculated by "driving amount of thefocus lens 33/moving amount of the image plane" as the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the value (absolute value), the smaller the moving amount of the image plane in the case of driving the focus lens by a predetermined value (e.g., 1 mm).

In addition to the above-described embodiment, the limiting operation and the limiting operation control process may be executed when a mute mode for suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 is set, and the limiting operation control process may not be executed when the mute mode is not set. When the mute mode is set, the drive sound of thefocus lens 33 may be preferentially suppressed, and the restricting operation shown in fig. 37 may be always performed without performing the restricting operation control processing shown in fig. 39.

In the above-described embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is (the driving amount of thefocus lens 33/the movement amount of the image plane), but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the image plane movement coefficient K is defined as (the amount of movement of the image plane/the amount of driving of the focus lens 33), the maximum image plane movement coefficient K can be used_maxThe control such as the limiting operation is performed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

EXAMPLE 17 EXAMPLE

Next, embodiment 17 of the present invention will be explained. Embodiment 17 has the same configuration asembodiment 12 described above, except for the following differences. Fig. 43 shows a table indicating the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used in embodiment 17 and the image plane movement coefficient K. That is, in embodiment 17, there are provided regions "X1" and "X2" which are regions on the very near side of the region indicated by "D0" including the very nearsoft limit position 460 shown in fig. 33. Further, the regions "X3" and "X4" are provided as regions more proximal than the region indicated by "D10" including the infinitesoft limit position 450.

The "X1" and "X2" regions are regions more proximal than the very close soft limit position, and are, for example, positions corresponding to themechanical end point 440 in the veryclose direction 420, positions between the very close soft limit position and theend point 440, and the like. The "X3" and "X4" regions are regions on the infinite side of the infinite soft limit position, and are, for example, positions corresponding to themechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410, positions between the infinite soft limit position and theend point 430, and the like.

Here, in the present embodiment, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 11", "α 21", … "α 91" in the "X1" region are smaller than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", … "K90" in the "D0" region. Likewise, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 12", "α 22", … "α 92" in the "X2" region are smaller than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", … "K90" in the "D0" region. In addition, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 13", "α 23", … "α 93" in the "X3" region are larger than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region. The values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 14", "α 24", … "α 94" in the "X4" region are larger than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K ("K10", "K20" … "K90") in "D0" is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient K ("K110", "K210" … "K910") in "D10" is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. In particular, the "X1", "X2", "X3" and "X4" regions are small regions that are required for driving thefocus lens 33 or not driving thefocus lens 33 depending on the conditions of aberrations, mechanical mechanisms, and the like.Therefore, even if the image plane movement coefficients "α 11", "α 21", … "α 94" corresponding to the "X1", "X2", "X3", and "X4" regions are set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIt also does not help with proper autofocus control (e.g., speed control of the focusing lens, mute control, gap fill control, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient in the region "D0" corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460 is set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient in the "D10" region corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450 is set as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxBut is not limited thereto.

For example, even if the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the regions "X1", "X2" on the very near side from the very near soft limit position and the regions "X3" and "X4" on the infinite side from the infinite soft limit position are stored in thelens memory 38, the image plane movement coefficient that is the smallest among the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the positions of the focus lens included in the search range (scanning range) of the contrast AF may be set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minSetting the maximum image plane movement coefficient of the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the position of the focus lens included in the search range of the contrast AF as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. Further, the image plane movement coefficient corresponding to the veryclose focus position 480 may be set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane shift coefficient corresponding to theinfinity position 470 is set as the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_max。

The embodiments described above are described for easy understanding of the present invention, and are not described for limiting the present invention. Therefore, the elements disclosed in the above embodiments are intended to include all design modifications and equivalents that fall within the technical scope of the present invention. The above embodiments can also be used in appropriate combinations.

Thecamera 1 according to any of the above-describedembodiments 12 to 17 is not particularly limited, and the present invention may be applied to amirrorless camera 1a having a replaceable lens, as shown in fig. 44, for example. In the example shown in fig. 44, the camera body 2a sequentially transmits captured images captured by theimaging element 22 to thecamera control unit 21, and displays the images on an Electronic Viewfinder (EVF)26 of the observation optical system via a liquidcrystal drive circuit 25. In this case, thecamera control unit 21 can detect the focus adjustment state of the photographing optical system by the contrast detection method by reading the output of theimage pickup device 22, for example, and calculating the focus evaluation value based on the read output. The present invention can be applied to other optical devices such as a digital video camera, a lens-integrated digital camera, and a camera for a mobile phone.

EXAMPLE 18 th embodiment

Next,embodiment 18 of the present invention will be explained. Fig. 45 is a perspective view showing the single-lens reflexdigital camera 1 of the present embodiment. Fig. 46 is a main component configuration diagram showing thecamera 1 of the present embodiment. Thedigital camera 1 of the present embodiment (hereinafter, simply referred to as the camera 1) is composed of acamera body 2 and alens barrel 3, and thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 are detachably coupled to each other.

Thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is attachable to and detachable from thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 46, thelens barrel 3 incorporates a photographing opticalsystem including lenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 and adiaphragm 36.

Thelens 33 is a focusing lens, and can adjust the focal length of the photographing optical system by moving in the direction of the optical axis L1. Thefocus lens 33 is provided movably along the optical axis L1 of thelens barrel 3, and its position is adjusted by a focuslens driving motor 331 while being detected by anencoder 332 for the focus lens.

The focuslens driving motor 331 is, for example, an ultrasonic motor, and drives thefocus lens 33 based on an electric signal (pulse) output from thelens control unit 37. Specifically, the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 by the focuslens driving motor 331 is expressed by pulses/second, and the larger the number of pulses per unit time, the faster the driving speed of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thecamera control unit 21 of thecamera body 2 transmits the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) of thefocus lens 33 to thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 outputs a pulse signal corresponding to the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) transmitted from thecamera body 2 to the focuslens drive motor 331, thereby driving thefocus lens 33 at the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) transmitted from thecamera body 2.

Thelens 32 is a zoom lens, and can adjust the focal length of the photographing optical system by moving in the direction of the optical axis L1. Similarly to the above-describedfocus lens 33, thezoom lens 32 is also detected in position by thezoom lens encoder 322, and is adjusted in position by the zoomlens driving motor 321. The position of thezoom lens 32 is adjusted by operating a zoom button provided in theoperation unit 28 or by operating a zoom ring (not shown) provided in thelens barrel 3.

Thediaphragm 36 is configured to be capable of adjusting the aperture diameter around the optical axis L1 in order to regulate the light amount of the light beam that reaches theimage pickup device 22 through the above-described imaging optical system and adjust the defocus amount. Theaperture 36 adjusts the aperture diameter by, for example, sending an appropriate aperture diameter calculated in the auto exposure mode from thecamera control unit 21 via thelens control unit 37. In addition, the set opening diameter is input from thecamera control unit 21 to thelens control unit 37 by manual operation of theoperation unit 28 provided in thecamera body 2. The aperture diameter of thediaphragm 36 is detected by a diaphragm aperture sensor, not shown, and the current aperture diameter is recognized by thelens control unit 37.

Thelens memory 38 stores an image plane movement coefficient K. The image plane movement coefficient K is a value indicating a correspondence relationship between a driving amount of thefocus lens 33 and a movement amount of the image plane, and is, for example, a ratio of the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 to the movement amount of the image plane. In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient is obtained by, for example, the following equation (3), and the smaller the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the amount of movement of the image plane caused by the driving of thefocus lens 33.

Image plane shift coefficient K (driving amount offocus lens 33/shift amount of image plane) … (3)

In thecamera 1 of the present embodiment, even when the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 is the same, the amount of movement of the image plane differs depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33. Similarly, even when the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 is the same, the amount of movement of the image plane differs depending on the lens position of thezoom lens 32, that is, the focal length. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thefocus lens 33 and also depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thezoom lens 32, and in the present embodiment, thelens control section 37 stores the image plane movement coefficient K for each lens position of thefocus lens 33 and each lens position of thezoom lens 32.

The image plane shift coefficient K can be defined as, for example, an image plane shift coefficient K (a shift amount of the image plane/a driving amount of the focus lens 33). In this case, the larger the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the amount of movement of the image plane accompanying the driving of thefocus lens 33.

Here, fig. 47 shows a table showing a relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement coefficient K. In the table shown in fig. 47, the drive region of thezoom lens 32 is divided into 9 regions "f 1" to "f 9" in order from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, and the drive region of thefocus lens 33 is divided into 9 regions "D1" to "D9" in order from the very near end to the infinity end, and image plane movement coefficients K corresponding to the respective lens positions are stored. For example, in a case where the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" and the lens position (photographing distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", the image plane movement coefficient K is "K11". The table shown in fig. 47 illustrates a form in which the driving region of each lens is divided into 9 regions, but the number is not particularly limited and can be set arbitrarily.

Next, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K will be described with reference to fig. 47_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe value is a value corresponding to the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficient K.For example, in fig. 47, when "K11" ═ 100 "," K12 "═ 200", "K13" ═ 300 "," K14 "═ 400", "K15" ═ 500 "," K16 "═ 600", "K17" ═ 700 "," K18 "═ 800", and K19 "═ 900", the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is the minimum "K11" ═ 100 ", which is the minimum value_minThe maximum value "900" is "K19" which is the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTypically in accordance with the current lens position of thezoom lens 32. In addition, if the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is generally changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_minAlso a constant value (fixed value). I.e. the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe fixed value (constant value) determined in general in accordance with the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is a value independent of the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33.

For example, in fig. 47, "K11", "K21", "K31", "K41", "K52", "K62", "K72", "K82" and "K91" shown in gray are minimum image plane movement coefficients K showing the minimum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_min. That is, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1", the image plane movement coefficient K when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1", that is, "K11", is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K that represents the minimum value among "D1" to "D9"_min. Therefore, the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K11" to "K19" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" to "D9", and the image plane movement coefficient K, i.e., "K11" when the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D1" represent the minimum value. Similarly, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 2", the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "K21" to "K29" which are image plane movement coefficients K in the cases of "D1" to "D9" The image plane movement coefficient K in the case of "D1", i.e., "K21", also represents the minimum value. That is, "K21" is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. Hereinafter, similarly, when the lens positions (focal lengths) of thezoom lens 32 are "f 3" to "f 9", the "K31", "K41", "K52", "K62", "K72", "K82" and "K91" shown in gray are also the minimum image plane movement coefficients K_min。

Likewise, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe value is a value corresponding to the maximum value of the image plane movement coefficient K. Maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxTypically in accordance with the current lens position of thezoom lens 32. In addition, if the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K is generally changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_maxAlso a constant value (fixed value). For example, "K19", "K29", "K39", "K49", "K59", "K69", "K79", "K89" and "K99" shown in fig. 47 by hatching are the maximum image plane movement coefficients K that represent the largest values among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_max。

As shown in fig. 47, thelens memory 38 stores the image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33, and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K indicating the minimum value of the image plane movement coefficients K for each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K representing the maximum value of the image plane movement coefficients K for each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32_max。

Thelens memory 38 may be set as the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minMinimum image plane movement coefficient K of nearby values_min' stored in thelens memory 38 in place of the minimum image plane movement coefficient K representing the smallest value among the image plane movement coefficients K_min. For example, the coefficient K is shifted at the minimum image plane_minWhen the value of (A) is 102.345, a large number of digits can be used100, which is a value near 102.345, is stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min'. This is because 102.345 (minimum image plane movement coefficient K) is stored in the lens memory 38_min) In contrast, 100 (minimum image plane movement coefficient K) is stored in the lens memory 38_min') can save the memory capacity of the memory and can suppress the capacity of the transmission data when transmitting to thecamera body 2.

In addition, for example, the coefficient K is moved at the minimum image plane_minWhen the value of (d) is 100, 98, which is a value near 100, can be stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in consideration of the stability of control such as gap filling control, mute control (limiting operation), and lens speed control described later_min'. For example, when stability of control is taken into consideration, it is preferable that the actual value (the minimum image plane movement coefficient K) is set_min) Set the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in the range of 80% -120%_min’。

On the other hand, thecamera body 2 includes amirror system 220 for guiding a light flux from an object to theimage pickup device 22, theviewfinder 235, thephotometry sensor 237, and thefocus detection module 261. Themirror system 220 includes aquick return mirror 221 that rotates by a predetermined angle between an observation position and an imaging position of an object around arotation shaft 223, and a sub-mirror 222 that is supported by thequick return mirror 221 and rotates in accordance with the rotation of thequick return mirror 221. In fig. 46, a state in which themirror system 220 is at the observation position of the object is indicated by a solid line, and a state in which the mirror system is at the imaging position of the object is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Themirror system 220 is inserted on the optical path of the optical axis L1 in a state of being at the observation position of the object, and rotates so as to retreat from the optical path of the optical axis L1 in a state of being at the image pickup position of the object.

Thequick return mirror 221 is a half mirror, and in a state where it is at an observation position of the object, a part of the light flux (optical axes L2, L3) of the light flux (optical axis L1) from the object is reflected by thequick return mirror 221 and guided to thefinder 235 and thephotometry sensor 237, and a part of the light flux (optical axis L4) is transmitted and guided to the sub-mirror 222. On the other hand, the sub-mirror 222 is configured by a total reflection mirror, and guides the light beam (optical axis L4) transmitted through thequick return mirror 221 to thefocus detection module 261.

Therefore, with themirror system 220 in the observation position, the light flux from the object (optical axis L1) is guided to thefinder 235, thephotometry sensor 237, and thefocus detection module 261, and the exposure operation, the detection of the focus adjustment state of thefocus lens 33, is performed while the object is observed by the photographer. Then, if the photographer presses the release button completely, themirror system 220 rotates to the photographing position, guides all the light beams (optical axis L1) from the subject to theimage pickup element 22, and saves the photographed image data in thememory 24.

The light flux (optical axis L2) from the subject reflected by thequick return mirror 221 is imaged on thefocal plate 231 disposed on the surface optically equivalent to theimage pickup device 22, and can be observed through thepentaprism 233 and theeyepiece 234. At this time, the transmissiveliquid crystal display 232 displays a focus detection area mark or the like superimposed on the object image on thefocal plate 231, and displays information related to image capturing such as a shutter speed, an aperture value, and the number of images captured in an area outside the object image. In this way, the photographer can observe the subject, the background thereof, the shooting related information, and the like through theviewfinder 235 in the shooting preparation state.

Thephotometric sensor 237 is configured by a two-dimensional color CCD image sensor or the like, and divides a photographing screen into a plurality of regions to output photometric signals corresponding to the luminance of each region in order to calculate an exposure value at the time of photographing. A signal detected by thephotometry sensor 237 is output to thecamera control section 21 for automatic exposure control.

Theimage pickup device 22 is provided on a predetermined focal plane of a photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 on an optical axis L1 of a light flux from an object of thecamera body 2, and ashutter 23 is provided in front of the image pickup device. Theimage pickup device 22 has a plurality of photoelectric conversion elements arranged two-dimensionally, and may be configured by a two-dimensional CCD image sensor, a MOS sensor, a CID, or the like. The image signal photoelectrically converted by theimage pickup device 22 is subjected to image processing by thecamera control unit 21, and then recorded in thecamera memory 24 as a recording medium. Thecamera memory 24 may be any of a removable card memory and a built-in memory.

Thecamera control unit 21 also detects a focus adjustment state of the photographing optical system based on a contrast detection method (hereinafter, referred to as "contrast AF" as appropriate) based on the pixel data read from theimage pickup device 22. For example, thecamera control unit 21 reads the output of theimage pickup device 22, and calculates the focus evaluation value based on the read output. The focus evaluation value can be obtained by extracting a high-frequency component from the output of theimage pickup device 22 using a high-frequency transmission filter, for example. The high-frequency component can also be obtained by extracting the high-frequency component using two high-frequency transmission filters having different cutoff frequencies.

Thecamera control unit 21 performs focus detection based on the contrast detection method as follows: thelens control unit 37 is sent a drive signal to drive thefocus lens 33 at a predetermined sampling interval (distance), and the focus evaluation value at each position is obtained, and the position of thefocus lens 33 at which the focus evaluation value becomes the maximum is obtained as the in-focus position. In addition, for example, when the focus evaluation value is calculated while thefocus lens 33 is driven, and when the focus evaluation value is changed twice in a rising manner and then twice in a falling manner, the focus position can be obtained by performing a calculation such as an interpolation method using the focus evaluation values.

In the focus detection by the contrast detection method, the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value increases as the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 increases, and when the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 exceeds a predetermined speed, the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value becomes excessively large, and the in-focus position cannot be appropriately detected. This is because the greater the sampling interval of the focus evaluation value, the greater the deviation of the focus position, and the lower the focus accuracy. Therefore, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 so that the moving speed of the image plane when thefocus lens 33 is driven becomes a speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected. For example, in the search control for driving thefocus lens 33 to detect the focus evaluation value, thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 so as to achieve the maximum image plane driving speed among the image plane moving speeds at which the sampling interval of the in-focus position can be appropriately detected. The search control includes, for example, wobbling, a vicinity search (vicinity scan) of searching only the vicinity of a predetermined position, and a full-area search (full-area scan) of searching the full drive range of thefocus lens 33.

Thecamera control unit 21 may drive thefocus lens 33 at a high speed when the seek control is started with a half-press of the release switch as a trigger, and may drive thefocus lens 33 at a low speed when the seek control is started with a condition other than the half-press of the release switch as a trigger. This is because, by performing control in this way, contrast AF with a high speed is performed when the release switch is half-pressed, and contrast AF with a favorable appearance of a preview image can be performed when the release switch is not half-pressed.

Further, thecamera control unit 21 may control thefocus lens 33 to be driven at a high speed in the search control in the still image shooting mode, and thefocus lens 33 to be driven at a low speed in the search control in the moving image shooting mode. This is because, by performing control in this way, contrast AF with a favorable appearance of moving images can be performed in the still image shooting mode at a high speed, and in the moving image shooting mode.

In at least one of the still image shooting mode and the moving image shooting mode, the contrast AF may be performed at a high speed in the moving image shooting mode and at a low speed in the landscape image shooting mode. Further, the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 during the search control may be changed according to the focal length, the shooting distance, the aperture value, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, focus detection by the phase difference detection method can also be performed. Specifically, thecamera body 2 includes afocus detection module 261, and thefocus detection module 261 has a pair of line sensors (not shown) in which a plurality of pixels each including a microlens arranged in the vicinity of a predetermined focal plane of the imaging optical system and a photoelectric conversion element arranged for the microlens are arranged. Then, a pair of light beams passing through a pair of regions different in exit pupil of the focusinglens 33 are received by each pixel arranged in the pair of line sensors, whereby a pair of image signals can be acquired. Further, by obtaining the phase shift of the pair of image signals acquired by the pair of line sensors by a known correlation operation, focus detection by a phase difference detection method for detecting the focus adjustment state can be performed.

Theoperation unit 28 is an input switch for setting various operation modes of thecamera 1 by a photographer, such as a shutter release button or a moving image photographing start switch, and is capable of switching between a still image photographing mode and a moving image photographing mode and between an autofocus mode and a manual focus mode, and further capable of switching between an AF-S mode and an AF-F mode in the autofocus mode. The various modes set by theoperation unit 28 are transmitted to thecamera control unit 21, and the operation of theentire camera 1 is controlled by thecamera control unit 21. In addition, the shutter release button includes a 1 st switch SW1 turned on by half pressing the button and a 2 nd switch SW2 turned on by full pressing the button.

Here, the AF-S mode is a mode in which, when the shutter release button is half pressed, after thefocus lens 33 is driven based on the focus detection result, the position of the once-adjustedfocus lens 33 is fixed, and imaging is performed at the focus lens position. The AF-S mode is a mode suitable for still picture photography, and is normally selected when still picture photography is performed. The AF-F mode is a mode in which thefocus lens 33 is driven based on the focus detection result regardless of whether or not the shutter release button is operated, and thereafter, the focus state is repeatedly detected, and when the focus state changes, thefocus lens 33 is driven to scan. The AF-F mode is a mode suitable for moving image shooting, and is normally selected when moving image shooting is performed.

In the present embodiment, a switch for switching between the single-shot mode and the continuous shooting mode may be provided as the switch for switching between the autofocus modes. In this case, the AF-S mode can be set when the photographer selects the single-shot mode, and the AF-F mode can be set when the photographer selects the continuous shooting mode.

Next, a method of communicating data between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 will be described.

Thecamera body 2 is provided with a body-side attachment portion 201 to which thelens barrel 3 is detachably attached. As shown in fig. 45, a connectingportion 202 protruding toward the inner surface side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 is provided in the vicinity of the body-side fitting portion 201 (on the inner surface side of the body-side fitting portion 201). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided in theconnection portion 202.

On the other hand, thelens barrel 3 is an interchangeable lens that is detachable from thecamera body 2, and thelens barrel 3 is provided with a lens-side mount 301 that is detachably attached to thecamera body 2. As shown in fig. 45, a connectingportion 302 protruding toward the inner surface side of the lens-sidefitting portion 301 is provided at a position near the lens-side fitting portion 301 (on the inner surface side of the lens-side fitting portion 301). A plurality of electrical contacts are provided at theconnection portion 302.

Also, if thelens barrel 3 is assembled to thecamera body 2, the electrical contact of theconnection portion 202 provided to the body-sidefitting portion 201 and the electrical contact of theconnection portion 302 provided to the lens-sidefitting portion 301 are electrically and physically connected. Thus, power supply from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 and data communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3 can be realized via theconnection portions 202 and 302.

Fig. 48 is a schematic diagram showing details of theconnection portions 202 and 302. Further, the connectingportion 202 is arranged on the right side of the body-sidefitting portion 201 in fig. 48, which simulates an actual fitting structure. That is, theconnection portion 202 of the present embodiment is disposed at a portion further to the rear side than the mounting surface of the body-side mounting portion 201 (a portion further to the right side than the body-side mounting portion 201 in fig. 48). Similarly, theconnection portion 302 is disposed on the right side of the lens-side mounting portion 301, which means that theconnection portion 302 of the present embodiment is disposed at a position protruding from the mounting surface of the lens-side mounting portion 301. By arranging theconnection portions 202 and 302 in this manner, the mounting surface of the body-side mounting portion 201 is brought into contact with the mounting surface of the lens-side mounting portion 301, and when thecamera body 2 is mounted and coupled to thelens barrel 3, theconnection portions 202 and 302 are connected, whereby the electrical contacts provided on both theconnection portions 202 and 302 are connected to each other.

As shown in fig. 48, 12 electrical contacts BP1 to BP12 are present in theconnection portion 202. Further, 12 electrical contacts LP1 to LP12 corresponding to the 12 electrical contacts on thecamera body 2 side are present in theconnection portion 302 on thelens 3 side.

The electrical contact BP1 and the electrical contact BP2 are connected to the 1 stpower supply circuit 230 in thecamera body 2. The 1 stpower supply circuit 230 supplies an operating voltage to each part (except for the relatively large power consumption circuits such as thelens drive motors 321 and 331) in thelens barrel 3 via the electrical contact BP1 and theelectrical contact LP 1. The voltage value supplied from the 1 stpower supply circuit 230 via the electrical contact BP1 and the electrical contact LP1 is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a voltage value of 3 to 4V (normally, a voltage value around 3.5V in the middle of the voltage width). In this case, the current value supplied from thecamera body side 2 to thelens barrel side 3 is a current value in the range of about several tens mA to several hundreds mA in the power on state. The electrical contacts BP2 and LP2 are ground terminals corresponding to the operating voltage supplied via the electrical contacts BP1 andLP 1.

The electric contacts BP3 to BP6 are connected to the camera-side 1st communication unit 291, and the electric contacts LP3 to LP6 are connected to the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 corresponding to the electric contacts BP3 to BP 6. The camera-side 1st communication unit 291 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 mutually transmit and receive signals by using these electrical contacts. The communication between the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 will be described in detail later.

Thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 is connected to the electrical contacts BP7 to BP10, and thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 is connected to the electrical contacts LP7 to LP10 corresponding to the electrical contacts BP7 to BP 10. Thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 and thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 transmit and receive signals to and from each other by these electrical contacts. The contents of communication performed by the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 and the lens-side 2nd communication unit 382 will be described in detail later.

The electrical contact BP11 and the electrical contact BP12 are connected to the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 in thecamera body 2. The 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 supplies an operating voltage to a circuit having relatively large power consumption, such as thelens drive motors 321 and 331, via the electrical contact BP11 and theelectrical contact LP 11. The voltage value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 is not particularly limited, and the maximum value of the voltage value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 may be about several times the maximum value of the voltage value supplied from the 1 stpower supply circuit 230. In this case, the current value supplied from the 2 ndpower supply circuit 240 to thelens barrel 3 side is a current value in the range of about several tens of mA to several a in the power on state. The electrical contacts BP12 and LP12 are ground terminals corresponding to the operating voltage supplied via the electrical contacts BP11 andLP 11.

The 1 st and 2nd communication units 291 and 292 on thecamera body 2 side shown in fig. 48 constitute the camera transmission/reception unit 29 shown in fig. 46, and the 1 st and 2nd communication units 381 and 382 on thelens barrel 3 side shown in fig. 48 constitute the lens transmission/reception unit 39 shown in fig. 46.

Next, communication (hereinafter, referred to as command data communication) between the camera-side 1st communication section 291 and the lens-side 1st communication section 381 will be described. Thelens control unit 37 performs command data communication in which transmission of control data from thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 to thelens side 1st communication unit 381 and transmission of response data from thelens side 1st communication unit 381 to thecamera side 1st communication unit 291 are performed in parallel at a predetermined cycle (for example, 16 msec intervals) via the signal line CLK including the electrical contacts BP3 and LP3, the signal line BDAT including the electrical contacts BP4 and LP4, the signal line LDAT including the electrical contacts BP5 and LP5, and the signal line RDY including the electrical contacts BP6 and LP 6.

Fig. 49 is a timing chart showing an example of command data communication. When thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 start command data communication (T1), first, the signal level of the signal line RDY is confirmed. Here, the signal level of the signal line RDY indicates whether or not communication is possible with thelens side 1st communication unit 381, and when communication is not possible, an H (high) level signal is output via thelens control unit 37 and thelens side 1st communication unit 381. The camera-side 1st communication unit 291 does not perform communication with thelens barrel 3 when the signal line RDY is at the H level, or does not perform the following processing when communication is in progress.

On the other hand, when the signal line RDY is at L (low) level, thecamera control section 21 and the camera-side 1st communication section 291 transmit theclock signal 401 to the lens-side 1st communication section 381 using the signal line CLK. In synchronization with theclock signal 401, thecamera control section 21 and thecamera side 1st communication section 291 transmit a camera sidecommand packet signal 402 as control data to thelens side 1st communication section 381 using the signal line BDAT. Further, if theclock signal 401 is output, thelens control section 37 and thelens side 1st communication section 381 transmit the lens sidecommand packet signal 403 as response data using the signal line LDAT in synchronization with theclock signal 401.

Thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 change the signal level of the signal line RDY from the L level to the H level in accordance with the completion of the transmission of the lens-side command packet signal 403 (T2). Next, thelens control unit 37 starts the 1st control process 404 based on the content of the camera sidecommand packet signal 402 received before the time T2.

For example, in the case where the received camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 is a content requesting specific data on thelens barrel 3 side, as the 1st control processing 404, thelens control section 37 performs processing of analyzing the content of thecommand packet signal 402 and generating the requested specific data. Furthermore, as the 1st control processing 404, thelens control section 37 also executes communication error check processing for simply checking whether or not an error is present in communication of thecommand packet signal 402 in accordance with the number of data bytes, using check sum data included in thecommand packet signal 402. The signal of the specific data generated in the 1st control processing 404 is output to thecamera body 2 side as a lens side packet signal 407 (T3). Further, the camera sidedata packet signal 406 output from thecamera body 2 side after thecommand packet signal 402 in this case is dummy data (including checksum data) having no particular meaning to the lens side. In this case, as the 2 nd control processing 408, thelens control section 37 executes the communication error check processing as described above using the check sum data included in the camera side data packet signal 406 (T4).

For example, when the camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 indicates a drive instruction of thefocus lens 33 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 406 indicates the drive speed and the drive amount of thefocus lens 33, thelens control unit 37 analyzes the content of thecommand packet signal 402 and generates a confirmation signal indicating that the content is understood as the 1 st control processing 404 (T2). The confirmation signal generated in the 1st control processing 404 is output to thecamera body 2 as the lens side packet signal 407 (T3). In addition, as the 2 nd control processing 408, thelens control section 37 performs analysis of the content of the cameraside packet signal 406, and performs communication error check processing using check sum data included in the camera side packet signal 406 (T4). Next, after the 2 nd control processing 408 is completed, thelens control section 37 drives the focuslens drive motor 331 based on the received camera-side packet signal 406, that is, the drive speed and the drive amount of thefocus lens 33, and drives thefocus lens 33 at the received drive speed and by the received drive amount (T5).

Further, when the 2 nd control processing 408 is completed, thelens control section 37 notifies thelens side 1st communication section 381 of the completion of the 2nd control processing 408. Thereby, thelens control section 37 outputs the L-level signal to the signal line RDY (T5).

The communication performed between the above-described times T1 to T5 is one command data communication. As described above, in the primary command data communication, thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 1st communication unit 291 transmit the camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 406 one each. In this way, in the present embodiment, for convenience of processing, the control data transmitted from thecamera body 2 to thelens barrel 3 is divided into two and transmitted, but the two camera-sidecommand packet signal 402 and the camera-sidedata packet signal 406 are combined to constitute one control data.

Similarly, in the primary command data communication, thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 1st communication unit 381 transmit the lens-sidecommand packet signal 403 and the lens-sidedata packet signal 407 one each. In this way, the response data transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2 is also divided into two, but the lens-sidecommand packet signal 403 and the lens-sidedata packet signal 407 are also combined into two to constitute one response data.

Next, communication between thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 and thelens side 2 nd communication unit 382 (hereinafter, referred to as passive infrared communication) will be described. Returning to fig. 48, thelens control unit 37 performs hot-line communication in which communication is performed at a cycle (for example, 1 millisecond interval) shorter than that of command data communication by the signal line HREQ including the electrical contacts BP7 and LP7, the signal line HANS including the electrical contacts BP8 and LP8, the signal line HCLK including the electrical contacts BP9 and LP9, and the signal line HDAT including the electrical contacts BP10 and LP 10.

For example, in the present embodiment, the lens information of thelens barrel 3 is transmitted from thelens barrel 3 to thecamera body 2 by hot-line communication. The lens information transmitted by the hot-wire communication includes the lens position of thefocus lens 33, the lens position of thezoom lens 32, and the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. Here, the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curThe image plane movement coefficient K is a coefficient corresponding to the current lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 can obtain the current position image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 by referring to the table indicating the relationship between the lens position (zoom lens position and focus lens position) and the image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38_cur. For example, in the example shown in fig. 47, when the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1" and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 is "D4", thelens control unit 37 sets "K" by hot-wire communication 14' as the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curAnd taking K11 as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd taking K19 as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd sent to thecamera control section 21.

Here, fig. 50 is a sequence diagram showing an example of hotline communication. Fig. 50(a) is a diagram showing a case where the hotline communication is repeatedly executed every predetermined cycle Tn. Fig. 50(b) shows a case where the period Tx of one of the repeatedly executed hot line communications is extended. Hereinafter, a case where the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is communicated by the hot-line communication will be described with reference to the timing chart of fig. 50 (b).

Thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 first output an L-level signal to the signal line HREQ to start communication by the hotline communication (T6). Next, thelens side 2nd communication unit 382 notifies thelens control unit 37 that the signal is input to the electrical contact LP 7. Thelens control unit 37 starts thegeneration processing 501 for generating lens position data in response to the notification. Thegeneration processing 501 is processing in which thelens control unit 37 causes thefocus lens encoder 332 to detect the position of thefocus lens 33 and generates lens position data indicating the detection result.

When thelens control section 37 executes thecompletion generation processing 501, thelens control section 37 and the lens-side 2nd communication section 382 output a signal of L level to the signal line HANS (T7). When the signal is input to the electrical contact BP8, thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292 output theclock signal 502 to the signal line HCLK from theelectrical contact BP 9.

In synchronization with theclock signal 502, thelens control unit 37 and the lens-side 2nd communication unit 382 output a lens position data signal 503 indicating lens position data to the signal line HDAT from the electrical contact LP 10. Next, when the transmission of the lens position data signal 503 is completed, thelens control section 37 and thelens side 2nd communication section 382 output a signal of H level from the electrical contact LP8 to the signal line HANS (T8). When the signal is input to the electrical contact BP8, thecamera side 2nd communication unit 292 outputs an H-level signal to the signal line HREQ from the electrical contact LP7 (T9).

Further, command data communication and hotline communication can be performed simultaneously or in parallel.

Next, an operation example of thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing the operation of thecamera 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, the following operation is started by turning on the power of thecamera 1.

First, in step S2101, thecamera body 2 performs communication for identifying thelens barrel 3. This is because communication modes capable of performing communication differ depending on the type of the lens barrel. Then, the process proceeds to step S2102, and in step S2102, thecamera control section 21 determines whether or not thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to a predetermined 1 st type of communication format. If it is determined as a result that the shot is a shot corresponding to thetype 1 communication format, the process proceeds to step S2103. On the other hand, if it is determined that thelens barrel 3 is a lens not corresponding to the predetermined 1 st type communication format, thecamera control unit 21 proceeds to step S2113. Further, thecamera control unit 21 may proceed to step S2113 when determining that thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to a communication format of the 2 nd type different from the communication format of the 1 st type. Further, when determining that thelens barrel 3 is a lens corresponding to the 1 st and 2 nd communication formats, thecamera control unit 21 may proceed to step S2103.

Next, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the live view photographing on/off switch provided in theoperation section 28 has been turned on by the photographer, and if the live view photographing is turned on, themirror system 220 reaches the photographing position of the object, and the light flux from the object is guided to theimage pickup element 22.

In step S2104, hotline communication is started between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3. In the passive infrared communication, as described above, when thelens control unit 37 receives the L-level signal (request signal) output to the signal line HREQ by thecamera control unit 21 and the camera-side 2nd communication unit 292, thelens control unit 21 transmits the lens information, and such transmission of the lens information is repeated. Further, the lens information includes, for example, a focusing lensLens position of 33, lens position ofzoom lens 32, and current position image plane shift coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxEach piece of information. The hotline communication is repeated after step S2104. The hot line communication is repeated until the power switch is turned off, for example. At this time, the image plane movement coefficient K is set with respect to the current position_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxPreferably, the image plane shift coefficient K is determined according to the current position_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAre transmitted in the order of (a).

When transmitting the lens information to thecamera control unit 21, thelens control unit 37 refers to a table (see fig. 47) stored in thelens memory 38 and indicating the relationship between each lens position and the image plane movement coefficient K, and acquires the current position image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 and the current lens position of thefocus lens 33_curAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the current lens position of thezoom lens 32_maxAnd minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe obtained current position image plane movement coefficient K_curMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTo thecamera control section 21.

In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the photographer has performed a half-press operation (turning on the 1 st switch SW 1) or an AF start operation on the release button provided in theoperation unit 28, and when these operations have been performed, the process proceeds to step S2106 (in the following embodiment, the case where the half-press operation has been performed will be described in detail).

Next, in step S2106, thecamera control unit 21 transmits a scan drive command (a scan drive start instruction) to thelens control unit 37 to perform focus detection by the contrast detection method. The scan drive command (the instruction of the drive speed or the instruction of the drive position during the scan drive) to thelens control unit 37 may be provided in accordance with the drive speed of thefocus lens 33, the image plane movement speed, the target drive position, or the like.

Then, in step S2107, thecamera control unit 21 controls thecamera control unit 21 to calculate the minimum image plane movement coefficient K from the image plane movement coefficient K acquired in step S2104_minThen, a process of determining the scanning driving speed V, which is the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 in the scanning operation, is performed. Here, the scanning operation means the following operation: thefocus lens 33 is driven at the scanning drive speed V determined in this step S2107 by the focuslens drive motor 331, and the calculation of the focus evaluation value by the contrast detection method is simultaneously performed at predetermined intervals by thecamera control section 21, whereby the detection of the in-focus position by the contrast detection method is performed at predetermined intervals.

In this scanning operation, when detecting the in-focus position by the contrast detection method, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the focus evaluation value at predetermined sampling intervals while scanning and driving thefocus lens 33, and detects the lens position at which the calculated focus evaluation value reaches the peak as the in-focus position. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 calculates focus evaluation values on different image planes by moving the image plane based on the optical system in the optical axis direction by scanning and driving thefocus lens 33, and detects a lens position at which the focus evaluation values reach a peak as an in-focus position. On the other hand, if the moving speed of the image plane is set too fast, the interval between the image planes for calculating the focus evaluation value may become too large, and the in-focus position may not be detected properly. In particular, since the image plane movement coefficient K indicating the image plane movement amount with respect to the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 changes depending on the lens position in the optical axis direction of thefocus lens 33, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at a constant speed, depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, there are cases where: since the moving speed of the image plane is too fast, the interval of the image plane for calculating the focus evaluation value becomes too large to appropriately detect the in-focus position.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, thecamera control unit 21 calculates the minimum image plane movement coefficient K based on the minimum image plane movement coefficient K acquired in step S2104_minThe sweep of the focusinglens 33 is calculatedScanning driving speed V in the scanning driving. Thecamera control section 21 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe scanning drive speed V is calculated so that the scanning drive speed V becomes a drive speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected by the contrast detection method and reaches the maximum drive speed.

Then, in step S2108, the scanning operation is started at the scanning drive speed V determined in step S2107. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 sends a scan drive start command to thelens control unit 37, and thelens control unit 37 drives the focuslens drive motor 331 in accordance with the command from thecamera control unit 21, and scans and drives thefocus lens 33 at the scan drive speed V determined in step S2107. Thecamera control unit 21 drives thefocus lens 33 at the scanning drive speed V, reads pixel outputs from image pickup pixels of theimage pickup device 22 at predetermined intervals, calculates a focus evaluation value based on the pixel outputs, obtains focus evaluation values at different focus lens positions, and detects a focus position by a contrast detection method.

Next, after thecamera control unit 21 performs the abnormality determination process described later in step S2109, thecamera control unit 21 determines whether or not the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected (whether or not the in-focus position can be detected) in step S2110. When the peak of the focus evaluation value cannot be detected, the process returns to step S2108, and the operations of steps S2108 to S2110 are repeated until the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected or thefocus lens 33 is driven to a predetermined driving end. On the other hand, when the peak of the focus evaluation value can be detected, the process proceeds to step S2111.

When the peak value of the focus evaluation value can be detected, the process proceeds to step S2111, and in step S2111, thecamera control unit 21 transmits an instruction for driving in focus to a position corresponding to the peak value of the focus evaluation value to thelens control unit 37. Thelens control unit 37 controls the driving of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the received command.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2112, and in step S2112, thecamera control unit 21 determines that thefocus lens 33 has reached a position corresponding to the peak of the focus evaluation value, and performs photographing control of the still picture when the photographer performs a full-press operation of the shutter release button (on of the 2 nd switch SW 2). After the imaging control ends, the process returns to step S2104 again.

Next, the abnormality determination process (the process of step S2109 in fig. 51) will be described in detail with reference to fig. 52 and 53.

First, description is given with reference to fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process in the present embodiment. In step S2201 shown in fig. 52, thecamera control unit 21 compares the minimum image plane movement coefficient K acquired in the current processing_minNamely, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained at this time_{min_0}And the minimum image plane movement coefficient K obtained in the last processing_minThat is, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained last time_{min_1}And judges whether they are the same value or different values. That is, in step S2201, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K repeatedly acquired is determined_minWhether a change has occurred. Obtaining the minimum image plane movement coefficient K at this time_{min_0}And the last time obtaining the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_1}When the image plane movement coefficients are the same value, that is, when it is determined that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is repeatedly acquired_minIf no change has occurred, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2203, where the abnormality flag is set to 0 (no abnormality), the abnormality determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S2110 in fig. 51. On the other hand, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is obtained at this time_{min_0}And the last time obtaining the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_1}When the image plane movement coefficient K is a different value, that is, when it is determined that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is repeatedly acquired_minIf the change has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not thecamera control unit 21 has performed a driving operation of thezoom lens 32. Further, as for the determination as to whether or not the driving operation of thezoom lens 32 is performed, for example, a method of detecting the driving operation of thezoom lens 32 by theoperation unit 28 may be employed, or a method of determining based on information of the lens position of thezoom lens 32 included in the lens information transmitted from thelens barrel 3 may be employed.

Then, when it is determined that the driving operation of thezoom lens 32 is performed, it is determined that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is caused by the driving of thezoom lens 32_minIf it is determined that no abnormality has occurred due to the change, the process proceeds to step S2203, where the abnormality flag is set to 0 (no abnormality), the abnormality determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S2110 in fig. 51. For example, in the example shown in fig. 47, in the case where the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 is "f 1", the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min"K11", and when thezoom lens 32 is driven so that the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 becomes "f 2", the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minFrom "K11" to "K12". Therefore, in the present embodiment, the coefficient of movement K is shifted even at the minimum image plane_minWhen the change occurs, it is determined that the image plane movement coefficient K is the minimum when the driving of thezoom lens 32 is detected_minIs caused by the driving of thezoom lens 32, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, in step S2202, when it is determined that the driving operation of thezoom lens 32 is not performed, it is determined that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is_minSince the change is made regardless of the driving of thezoom lens 32, it is determined that any one of abnormality such as communication abnormality, circuit abnormality, abnormality of the storage unit (memory), power abnormality, etc. has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2204, where an abnormality flag is set to 1 (there is an abnormality), the abnormality determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S2110 in fig. 51. As described above, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe minimum image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the current lens position of thezoom lens 32 in general_minHas the following properties: if the lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is generally changed even if the current lens position of thefocus lens 33 changes_minAlso a constant value (fixed value). In contrast, for example, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is set in spite of no change in the lens position of thezoom lens 32_minWhen the change has occurred, it can be determined that a communication abnormality, a circuit abnormality, an abnormality of a storage unit (memory), or the like has occurred,In the present embodiment, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in such a case, and the abnormality flag is set to 1 (presence of an abnormality).

That is, referring to the example of the case shown in fig. 53, for example, in "no abnormality" shown in fig. 53(a), thefocus lens 33 is driven in accordance with the scan drive command, and thefocus lens 33 is driven, so that the times t1, t2, t3, t4 and the current position image plane movement coefficient K are set to the current position image plane movement coefficient K_curA change occurs even in such a case, when the focal length does not change (i.e., the lens position of thezoom lens 32 does not change), the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minConstant value, minimum image plane movement coefficient K is shown as 100_minUsually without change. I.e. due to the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient K is the smallest coefficient among the image plane movement coefficients K indicating the correspondence relationship between the driving amount of thefocus lens 33 and the movement amount of the image plane, and is usually dependent on the focal length, and therefore, when the focal length is not changed (that is, when the lens position of thezoom lens 32 is not changed), as shown in fig. 53(a), the smallest image plane movement coefficient K is the smallest coefficient among the image plane movement coefficients K_minIs a constant value.

On the other hand, as in the example of "abnormal state" shown in fig. 53(b), for example, at times t1, t2, and t3, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is_minA constant value is shown at 100, but although the focal length is unchanged (although the focal length is 50), at time t4, the coefficient of image shift K is minimum_minWhen the number is changed from 100 to 80, in the present embodiment, it is determined that any one of the abnormalities such as a communication abnormality, a circuit abnormality, an abnormality of a storage unit (memory), and a power supply abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality flag is set to 1 (there is an abnormality).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that a certain abnormality has occurred and the abnormality flag is set to 1, thecamera control unit 21 executes abnormality processing. As the abnormality processing, for example, processing for prohibiting in-focus display by theelectronic viewfinder 26 or the like is performed. In particular, when the abnormality flag is set to 1, communication abnormality, circuit abnormality, abnormality of a storage unit (memory), power supply abnormality, and the like may occur, and reliability of focus detection may not be ensured in many cases. Therefore, it is preferable to perform an abnormal process such as prohibiting the focus display so as not to perform the "focus display" with low reliability. In this case, by setting the abnormality flag to 1 in step S2203, the in-focus display is not performed even when thefocus lens 33 reaches the in-focus position in step S2111 when the in-focus display is prohibited.

When the abnormality flag is set to 1, it is also preferable to perform a full-area search for driving thefocus lens 33 from the very near end to the infinity end, for example, instead of or together with the process of prohibiting the in-focus display. This is because, by performing the full-area search, the cause of the abnormality can be confirmed to be eliminated. In particular, in this case, it is more preferable to perform the full-area search in which thefocus lens 33 is driven from the very near end to the infinity end at the 2 nd driving speed which is sufficiently slower than the 1 st driving speed which is the driving speed in the normal state, and thus the full-area search can be performed more safely by performing the full-area search at the sufficiently slow 2 nd driving speed.

Further, when the abnormality flag is set to 1, processing for prohibiting focus display or processing for performing a full-area search at a sufficiently slow 2 nd drive speed may be performed instead of or together with the processing for prohibiting focus detection by the contrast detection method. In this case, in addition to the focus detection by the contrast detection method, the processing of prohibiting the focus detection by the phase difference detection method may be performed. In particular, when the abnormality flag is set to 1 and it is considered that some abnormality such as a communication abnormality occurs, there is a high possibility that a good focus detection result cannot be obtained even when focus detection by the contrast detection method or focus detection by the phase difference detection method is performed, and therefore, in such a case, processing for prohibiting focus detection by the contrast detection method or focus detection by the phase difference detection method is preferentially performed.

Alternatively, when the abnormality flag is set to 1, thefocus lens 33 may be moved to the drive end, for example, the very near end, and by performing such processing, the amount of defocus of the obtained preview image can be increased, and the photographer can be notified of the occurrence of some abnormality. When the abnormality flag is set to 1, thefocus lens 33 may be moved to the infinity end without being moved to the very close end.

In the present embodiment, since it is considered that some abnormality such as a communication abnormality has occurred when the abnormality flag is set to 1 at a time, the setting of "abnormality flag is preferably maintained to 1" until the power supply is turned off or thelens barrel 3 is replaced without resetting the abnormality flag. In particular, in step S2203 of fig. 52, when the abnormality flag is set to 1, the reliability of focus detection cannot be ensured, and therefore, in order to avoid unnecessary driving of thefocus lens 33, thecamera control unit 21 may perform a process of prohibiting driving of thefocus lens 33 regardless of whether or not the peak value can be detected in step S2110. In this case, it is preferable to prohibit the driving of thefocus lens 33 until the power is turned off or thelens barrel 3 is replaced.

For example, in step S2109 of fig. 51, when the abnormality flag is set to 1, thecamera control unit 21 may perform processing for performing a full-area search at the sufficiently slow 2 nd drive speed, processing for prohibiting at least one of the focus detection by the phase difference detection method and the focus detection by the contrast detection method, processing for turning off the power supply of the camera, a warning display indicating that an abnormality has occurred, and the like, regardless of whether or not the peak value can be detected in step S2110. Further, for example, in step S2203 in fig. 52, when the abnormality flag is set to 1, the reliability of focus detection cannot be ensured, and therefore thecamera control unit 21 may perform processing not to perform the focus drive in step S2111 even if the peak value can be detected in step S2110.

On the other hand, in step S2102, it is determined that thelens barrel 3 is a mirror not corresponding to the predetermined 1 st type of communication formatIn the case of the header, the process proceeds to step S2113, and the processes of steps S2113 to S2121 are executed. In steps S2113 to S2121, the same processing as in steps S2103 to S2112 is performed except for three points, that is, when transmission of lens information is repeatedly performed by hot-line communication between thecamera body 2 and thelens barrel 3, the transmission does not include the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAs lens information (step S2114); when the scanning driving speed V, which is the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 during the scanning operation, is determined, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is replaced_minOr correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_{min_x}And using the current position image plane movement coefficient K contained in the lens information_cur(step S2117); the abnormality determination processing is not performed.

EXAMPLE 19 th embodiment

Next,embodiment 19 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 19 has the same configuration asembodiment 18 described above, except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 45 operates as described below.

That is, the 19 th embodiment is the same as the 18 th embodiment except that it is different from the 18 th embodiment in the point that, in the 18 th embodiment, when the focus position can be detected by the contrast detection method in step S2110 in the flowchart shown in fig. 51, when the focus drive is performed based on the result of the contrast detection method in step S2111, it is determined whether or not the gap filling drive is performed, and based on the determination, the drive form of thefocus lens 33 when the focus drive is performed is made different.

That is, the focuslens driving motor 331 for driving thefocus lens 33 shown in fig. 46 is generally constituted by a mechanical drive transmission mechanism, and such a drive transmission mechanism is constituted by the 1st drive mechanism 500 and the 2nd drive mechanism 600 as shown in fig. 54, for example, and has the following configuration: by driving the 1st drive mechanism 500, the 2nd drive mechanism 600 on the focusinglens 33 side is driven along with this, and thereby the focusinglens 33 is moved to the very near side or the infinity side. In such a drive mechanism, the gap amount G is usually provided in view of smooth operation of the meshing portion of the gears. On the other hand, in the contrast detection method, in this mechanism, as shown in fig. 55(a) and 55(B), thefocus lens 33 needs to be driven to the in-focus position by reversing the driving direction after passing through the in-focus position once by the scanning operation. In this case, when the gap filling drive is not performed as shown in fig. 55(B), there is a characteristic that the lens position of thefocus lens 33 is shifted from the in-focus position by the gap amount G. Therefore, in order to eliminate the influence of the gap amount G, as shown in fig. 55(a), when thefocus lens 33 is driven to focus, it is necessary to perform gap filling driving in which the driving direction is again reversed and the lens is driven to the focus position after passing through the focus position once.

Fig. 55 is a diagram showing the relationship between the focus lens position and the focus evaluation value and the relationship between the focus lens position and time when the scanning operation and the focus drive by the contrast detection method of the present embodiment are performed. Fig. 55(a) shows the following configuration: at time t0, the scanning operation of thefocus lens 33 is started from infinity to the close side from the lens position P0, and then, at time t1 when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the lens position P1, if the peak position (focus position) P2 of the focus evaluation value is detected, the scanning operation is stopped, and the focus drive with the gap filling drive is performed, so that thefocus lens 33 is driven to the focus position attime t 2. On the other hand, fig. 55(B) shows the following form: similarly, at time t0, after the scanning operation is started, at time t1, the scanning operation is stopped, and the focus driving is performed without the gap filling driving, so that thefocus lens 33 is driven to the in-focus position attime t 3.

Next, an operation example inembodiment 19 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in fig. 56. In the flowchart shown in fig. 51, when the in-focus position is detected by the contrast detection method in step S2110, the following operation is performed. That is, as shown in fig. 55 a and 55B, when the scanning operation is started from time t0 and the peak position (in-focus position) P2 of the focus evaluation value is detected at time t1 when thefocus lens 33 is moved to the lens position P1, the scanning operation is executed attime t 1.

That is, when the in-focus position is detected by the contrast detection method, first, in step S2301, thecamera control unit 21 acquires the minimum image plane movement coefficient K at the current lens position of thezoom lens 32_min. Further, with respect to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minBy the above-described hot-line communication between thecamera control unit 21 and thelens control unit 37, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be acquired from thelens control unit 37 via the lens transmitting/receivingunit 39 and the camera transmitting/receivingunit 29_min。

Next, in step S2302, thecamera control unit 21 acquires information on the gap amount G (see fig. 54) of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33. The gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 can be obtained by storing it in alens memory 38 provided in thelens barrel 3 in advance, for example, and referring to it. Specifically, the following can be obtained: thecamera control unit 21 transmits a request for transmission of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 to thelens control unit 37 via the camera transmission/reception unit 29 and the lens transmission/reception unit 39, and causes thelens control unit 37 to transmit information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 stored in thelens memory 38. Alternatively, the following configuration may be adopted: the lens information transmitted and received by the above-described hotline communication between thecamera control unit 21 and thelens control unit 37 includes information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 stored in thelens memory 38.

Next, in step S2303, thecamera control unit 21 controls thecamera control unit 21 to obtain the minimum image plane movement coefficient K obtained in step S2301_minAnd the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is calculated from the information of the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 acquired in step S2302. The image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is obtained by driving the focus lens by the gap amount GThe amount of movement of the image plane in the case of the same amount is calculated according to the following equation in the present embodiment.

Image plane movement amount IG corresponding to gap amount G is equal to gap amount G × minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min

Next, in step S2304, thecamera control unit 21 performs a process of comparing the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G calculated in step S2303 with the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, and as a result of the comparison, determines whether or not the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, that is, whether or not "the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G" is equal to or less than "the predetermined image plane movement amount IP" is established. The predetermined image plane movement amount IP is set in accordance with the focal depth of the optical system, and is usually set to an image plane movement amount corresponding to the focal depth. Since the predetermined image plane movement amount IP is set to the depth of focus of the optical system, it can be set as appropriate according to the F value, the cell size of theimaging element 22, and the format of the captured image. That is, the predetermined image plane movement amount IP can be set to be larger as the F value is larger. Alternatively, the predetermined image plane movement amount IP can be set to be larger as the unit size of theimage pickup device 22 is larger or the image format is smaller. When the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, the process proceeds to step S2305. On the other hand, if the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is larger than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2305, it is determined in step S2304 that the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, and therefore in this case, it is determined that the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 can be within the depth of focus of the optical system even when the gap filling drive is not performed, it is determined that the gap filling drive is not performed during the focus drive, and based on this determination, the focus drive is performed without the gap filling drive. That is, it is determined that thefocus lens 33 is directly driven to the focus position at the time of focus driving, and based on this determination, focus driving without gap filling driving is performed as shown in fig. 55 (B).

On the other hand, in step S2306, since it is determined in step S2304 that the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is larger than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP, in this case, it is determined that the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 cannot be brought within the depth of focus of the optical system if the gap filling drive is not performed, it is determined that the gap filling drive is performed during the focus drive, and the focus drive accompanied by the gap filling drive is performed based on the determination. That is, when thefocus lens 33 is driven to perform focus driving, the focus lens passes through the focus position once and then is driven to the focus position by performing reverse driving again, and based on this determination, as shown in fig. 55(a), focus driving accompanied by gap filling driving is performed.

In the 19 th embodiment, as described above, the gap filling control is performed in accordance with the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33, calculates an image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G, determines whether or not the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the calculated gap amount G is equal to or less than a predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system, and determines whether or not to execute the gap filling drive when the focus drive is performed. As a result of the determination, when the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is equal to or less than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system and the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 can be within the focal depth of the optical system, the gap filling drive is not performed, and when the image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G is larger than the predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system and the lens position of the drivenfocus lens 33 cannot be within the focal depth of the optical system without the gap filling drive, the gap filling drive is performed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the gap filling drive is not required, the gap filling drive is not performed, and the time required for the focusing drive can be shortened, thereby shortening the time of the focusing operation. On the other hand, when gap filling is required In the case of the stopper drive, a gap filling drive can be performed to obtain a good focusing accuracy.

In particular, inembodiment 19, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_minBy calculating an image plane movement amount IG corresponding to the gap amount G of the drive transmission mechanism of thefocus lens 33 and comparing it with a predetermined image plane movement amount IP corresponding to the focal depth of the optical system, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gap filling drive at the time of focusing is required.

In the gap filling control according toembodiment 19 described above, thecamera control unit 21 may determine whether or not gap filling is necessary based on the focal length, the aperture, and the object distance. Thecamera control unit 21 may change the driving amount of the gap filling according to the focal length, the aperture, and the object distance. For example, in the case where the aperture is reduced to be smaller than the predetermined value (the F value is large), it may be determined that gap filling is not necessary or that the driving amount of gap filling is controlled to be reduced, as compared with the case where the aperture is not reduced to be smaller than the predetermined value (the F value is small). Further, for example, it may be determined that gap filling is not necessary or controlled so that the driving amount of gap filling is reduced on the wide angle side as compared with the telephoto side.

EXAMPLE 20 embodiment

Next,embodiment 20 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 20 has the same configuration asembodiment 18 described above, except that thecamera 1 shown in fig. 45 operates as described below.

That is, inembodiment 20, the limiting operation (mute control) described below is performed. Inembodiment 20, the movement speed of the image plane of thefocus lens 33 is controlled to be constant in the search control based on the contrast detection method, and the limiting operation for suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 is performed in the search control based on the contrast detection method. Here, the limiting operation performed inembodiment 20 is an operation of limiting the speed of thefocus lens 33 so as not to fall below the mute lower limit lens movement speed when the speed of thefocus lens 33 becomes slow and muting is hindered.

Inembodiment 20, as will be described later, thecamera control unit 21 of thecamera body 2 compares the predetermined mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b with the focus lens driving speed V1a by using a predetermined coefficient (Kc) to determine whether or not the limiting operation should be performed.

When thecamera control unit 21 permits the limiting operation, thelens control unit 37 limits the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b in order to avoid the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33, which will be described later, from falling below the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. The following is a detailed description with reference to a flowchart shown in fig. 57. Here, fig. 57 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation (mute control) inembodiment 20.

In step S2401, thelens control unit 37 acquires the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. The mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control unit 37 can acquire the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b from thelens memory 38.

In step S2402, thelens control unit 37 acquires a drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33. In the present embodiment, thelens control unit 37 can acquire the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 by transmitting the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 from thecamera control unit 21 to thelens control unit 37 by command data communication.

In step S2403, thelens control unit 37 compares the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b acquired in step S2401 with the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 acquired in step S2402. Specifically, thelens control unit 37 determines whether or not the drive instruction speed (unit: pulse/sec) of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec), and proceeds to step S2404 when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed, and proceeds to step S2405 when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

In step S2404, it is determined that the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In this case, thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b in order to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33. In this way, when the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, thelens control unit 37 limits the lens drive speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

On the other hand, in step S2405, it is determined that the drive instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2 is equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In this case, since the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 of a predetermined value or more is not generated (or the driving sound is extremely small), thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 at the driving instruction speed of thefocus lens 33 transmitted from thecamera body 2.

Here, fig. 58 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 and the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and is a diagram in which the vertical axis is the lens driving speed and the horizontal axis is the image plane movement coefficient K. As shown in the horizontal axis of fig. 58, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, and in the example shown in fig. 58, the image plane movement coefficient K tends to be smaller toward the very near side and larger toward the infinity side. In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the focus detection operation is performed, thefocus lens 33 is driven at a constant speed of the movement speed of the image plane, and therefore, as shown in fig. 58, the actual driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 changes depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33. That is, in the example shown in fig. 58, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at a speed at which the moving speed of the image plane is constant, the lens moving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is slower on the very near side and faster on the infinity side.

On the other hand, as shown in fig. 58, in the case of driving thefocus lens 33, if the image plane movement speed in such a case is shown, it is constant as shown in fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max due to the driving of thefocus lens 33, and is a diagram in which the vertical axis is the image plane movement speed and the horizontal axis is the image plane movement coefficient K. In fig. 58 and 60, the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement speed by the driving of thefocus lens 33 are both indicated by V1 a. Therefore, V1a is variable when the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 is shown in fig. 58, and is constant when the image plane moving speed is shown in fig. 60.

Further, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at a constant moving speed of the image plane, if the limiting operation is not performed, the lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 may be lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b as in the example shown in fig. 58. For example, when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K can be obtained_minThe position of the focus lens 33 (in fig. 58, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K)_min100), the lens moving speed V1a is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

In particular, when the focal length of thelens barrel 3 is long and the light environment is bright, the lens movement speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 tends to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. In such a case, by performing the limiting operation, as shown in fig. 58, thelens control unit 37 can limit the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (control the speed to be not lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b) (step S2404), thereby suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33.

Next, referring to fig. 59, the limiting operation control process for determining whether to permit or prohibit the limiting operation shown in fig. 57 will be described. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the limiting operation control processing of the present embodiment. The operation limiting control processing described below is executed by thecamera body 2 when, for example, the AF-F mode or the moving image capturing mode is set.

First, in step S2501, thecamera control unit 21 acquires lens information. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 acquires information from thelens barrel 3 by hot-line communicationCurrent image plane movement coefficient K_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

Then, in step S2502, thecamera control unit 21 calculates a mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max. The image plane movement speed V0b _ max at the lower limit of mute is the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane moving speed when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the above-described mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the position of thefocus lens 33. The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max will be described in detail below.

First, as shown in fig. 58, it is determined whether or not a driving sound is generated due to the driving of thefocus lens 33 based on the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33, and therefore, as shown in fig. 58, the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b is a constant speed in the case of being expressed by the lens driving speed. On the other hand, if the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is expressed by the image plane movement speed, the image plane movement coefficient K varies depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33 as described above, and thus is variable as shown in fig. 60. In fig. 58 and 60, the mute lower limit lens movement speed (the lower limit value of the actual driving speed of the focus lens 33) and the image plane movement speed when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed are both indicated by V0 b. Therefore, V0b is constant (parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the actual driving speed of thefocus lens 33 as shown in fig. 58, and variable (not parallel to the horizontal axis) when the vertical axis of the graph is the image plane moving speed as shown in fig. 60.

In the present embodiment, the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is set so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be obtained when thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the image plane movement speed is constant_minThe movement speed of thefocus lens 33 at the position of the focus lens 33 (in the example shown in fig. 60, the image plane movement coefficient K is 100) is the image plane movement speed of the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b. That is, in the present embodiment, the lens movement speed is limited to the muteWhen thefocus lens 33 is driven, the image plane moving speed that reaches the maximum (in the example shown in fig. 60, the image plane moving speed at which the image plane moving coefficient K is 100) is set to the mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0b _ max.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the maximum image plane movement speed (the image plane movement speed at the lens position at which the image plane movement coefficient becomes minimum) among the image plane movement speeds corresponding to the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, which vary depending on the lens position of thefocus lens 33, is calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max. For example, in the example shown in fig. 60, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minTo "100", the image plane movement speed at the lens position of thefocus lens 33 whose image plane movement coefficient is "100" is therefore calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b — max.

Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 uses the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec) and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K as shown in the following expression_min(unit: pulse/mm), the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) is calculated.

The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is equal to the mute lower limit lens movement speed (actual driving speed of the focus lens) V0 b/the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min

Thus, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is used_minThe mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated, so that the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max can be calculated at the timing of starting the focus detection or the motion picture photography by the AF-F. For example, in the example shown in fig. 60, when focus detection or moving image shooting by AF-F is started at a timing t1 ', the image plane movement speed at the lens position of thefocus lens 33 at which the image plane movement coefficient K is "100" can be calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max at this timing t 1'.

Next, in step S2503, thecamera control unit 21 compares the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection acquired in step S2501 with the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max calculated in step S2502. Specifically, thecamera control unit 21 determines whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a (unit: mm/sec) for focus detection and the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) satisfy the following expression.

(image plane moving speed V1a XKc for focus detection) > mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0b _ max

In the above expression, the coefficient Kc is a value of 1 or more (Kc ≧ 1), and details thereof will be described later.

If the above expression is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2504, and thecamera control unit 21 allows the restricting operation shown in fig. 57. That is, in order to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33, as shown in fig. 58, the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is limited to the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b (seek control is performed so that the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is not lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b).

On the other hand, if the above expression is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2505, and the restricting operation shown in fig. 57 is prohibited. That is, in a case where the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is not limited by the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is allowed to be lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b), thefocus lens 33 is driven at the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected.

Here, as shown in fig. 58, if the limiting operation is allowed and the driving speed of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the movement speed of the image plane becomes faster at a lens position where the image plane movement coefficient K is small, and as a result, the movement speed of the image plane becomes faster than the image plane movement speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, and appropriate in-focus accuracy may not be obtained. On the other hand, when the limiting operation is prohibited and thefocus lens 33 is driven so that the moving speed of the image plane becomes the image plane moving speed at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, as shown in fig. 58, there is a case where the driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b and a driving sound of a predetermined value or more is generated.

As described above, when the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection is lower than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, it may be a problem that thefocus lens 33 is driven at a lens driving speed lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b so as to obtain the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected, or that thefocus lens 33 is driven at a lens driving speed equal to or higher than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b so as to suppress the driving sound of thefocus lens 33.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the above expression is satisfied even when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the coefficient Kc in the above expression is stored in advance as a value of 1 or more that can ensure a certain focus detection accuracy. Thus, as shown in fig. 60, when the above expression is satisfied even when the image plane movement speed V1a for focus detection is lower than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, thecamera control unit 21 determines that a certain focus detection accuracy can be secured, preferentially suppresses the driving sound of thefocus lens 33, and permits the limiting operation of driving thefocus lens 33 at a lens driving speed lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b.

On the other hand, if the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is equal to or less than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, if the limiting operation is permitted and the drive speed of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the image plane movement speed for focus detection may be too high to ensure the focus detection accuracy. Therefore, when the above expression is not satisfied, thecamera control unit 21 prioritizes the focus detection accuracy and prohibits the limiting operation shown in fig. 57. Thus, the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected can be set as the image plane movement speed at the time of focus detection, and focus detection can be performed with high accuracy.

Further, when the aperture value is large (the aperture opening is small), the depth of field becomes deep, and therefore the sampling interval at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected becomes wide. As a result, the image plane movement speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected can be increased. Therefore, when the image plane moving speed V1a at which the in-focus position can be appropriately detected is a fixed value, thecamera control unit 21 can increase the coefficient Kc of the above expression as the aperture value increases.

Similarly, in the case where the image size of a live view image or the like is small (the case where the compression rate of the image is high or the thinning rate of pixel data is high), since high focus detection accuracy is not required, the coefficient Kc of the above expression can be increased. In addition, the coefficient Kc of the above equation can be increased even when the pixel pitch in theimage sensor 22 is large.

Next, the control of the restricting operation will be described in more detail with reference to fig. 61 and 62. Fig. 61 is a diagram showing a relationship between the image plane movement speed V1a and the limiting operation at the time of focus detection, and fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining a relationship between the actual lens driving speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 and the limiting operation.

For example, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the search control is started with the half-press of the release switch as a trigger and when the search control is started with a condition other than the half-press of the release switch as a trigger, the moving speed of the image plane in the search control may be different depending on the still image shooting mode and the moving image shooting mode, the moving image shooting mode and the landscape shooting mode, or the focal length, the shooting distance, the aperture value, and the like. In fig. 61, such different moving speeds V1a _1, V1a _2, V1a _3 of 3 image planes are illustrated.

Specifically, the image plane moving speed V1a _1 at the time of focus detection shown in fig. 61 is the maximum moving speed among the moving speeds of the image plane in which the focus state can be appropriately detected, and is the moving speed of the image plane satisfying the relationship of the above expression. The image plane movement speed V1a _2 at the time of focus detection is slower than the image plane movement speed V1a _1, but is the image plane movement speed satisfying the relationship of the above expression at timing t 1'. On the other hand, the image plane movement speed V1a _3 at the time of focus detection is a movement speed of the image plane that does not satisfy the relationship of the above expression.

In this way, in the example shown in fig. 61, when the moving speed of the image plane at the time of focus detection is V1a _1 and V1a _2, the relationship of the above expression is satisfied at the timing t1, and therefore the restricting operation shown in fig. 61 is permitted. On the other hand, when the moving speed of the image plane at the time of focus detection is V1a _3, the relationship of the above expression is not satisfied, and therefore the restricting operation shown in fig. 57 is prohibited.

This point will be described specifically with reference to fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a view showing the vertical axis of the view shown in fig. 61 changed from the image plane movement speed to the lens driving speed. As described above, the lens driving speed V1a _1 of thefocus lens 33 satisfies the relationship of the above expression (3), and therefore the restricting operation is allowed. However, as shown in fig. 62, the lens driving speed V1a _1 is not lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b even at the lens position where the minimum image plane movement coefficient (K100) can be obtained, and therefore, the limiting operation is not actually performed.

Further, since the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 also satisfies the relationship of the above equation at the timing t 1' that is the start timing of the focus detection, the restricting operation is allowed. In the example shown in fig. 62, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the lens driving speed V1a _2, the lens driving speed V1a _2 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is K1, and therefore the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 is limited at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is smaller than K1 at the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0 b.

That is, by performing the limiting operation at the lens position where the lens driving speed V1a _2 of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, the movement speed V1a _2 of the image plane at the time of focus detection is controlled to search for the focus evaluation value at a movement speed of the image plane different from the movement speed (search speed) of the image plane immediately before the image plane. That is, as shown in fig. 61, at the lens position where the image plane movement coefficient is smaller than K1, the movement speed V1a — 2 of the image plane at the time of focus detection is a speed different from the constant speed immediately before.

Further, since the lens driving speed V1a _3 of thefocus lens 33 does not satisfy the relationship of the above expression, the restricting operation is prohibited. Therefore, in the example shown in fig. 62, when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the lens driving speed V1a _3, the lens driving speed V1a _3 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K is K2, but the restricting operation is not performed at the lens position where the image plane moving coefficient K smaller than K2 can be obtained, and the restricting operation is not performed even if the driving speed V1a _3 of thefocus lens 33 is lower than the mute lower limit lens moving speed V0b in order to appropriately detect the focus state.

As described above, inembodiment 20, the maximum image plane movement speed among the image plane movement speeds in the case where thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b is calculated as the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, and the calculated mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is compared with the image plane movement speed V1a at the time of focus detection. When the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is higher than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, it is determined that focus detection accuracy equal to or higher than a certain level can be obtained even when thefocus lens 33 is driven at the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b, and the limiting operation shown in fig. 57 is permitted. Thus, in the present embodiment, the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 can be suppressed while ensuring the focus detection accuracy.

On the other hand, when the drive speed V1a of thefocus lens 33 is limited in accordance with the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc (where Kc ≧ 1) at the time of focus detection is equal to or less than the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max, there is a case where appropriate focus detection accuracy cannot be obtained. Therefore, in this embodiment, the limiting operation shown in fig. 57 is prohibited in order to obtain an image plane moving speed suitable for focus detection. Thus, in the present embodiment, the in-focus position can be appropriately detected at the time of focus detection.

In the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is stored in advance in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3_minUsing the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is calculated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in fig. 54At the timing of time t1 when moving image shooting is started or focus detection is performed in the AF-F mode, it is determined whether or not the image plane moving speed V1a xKc (where Kc ≧ 1) for focus detection exceeds the mute lower limit image plane moving speed V0b _ max, and it is determined whether or not the limiting operation is performed. In this way, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is not used at the current position_curThe minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be used by repeatedly determining whether to perform the limiting operation_minSince it is determined whether or not the limiting operation is performed at the first timing of starting the moving image capturing or the focus detection in the AF-F mode, the processing load of thecamera body 2 can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the restricted operation control process shown in fig. 57 is executed in thecamera body 2 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the restricted operation control process shown in fig. 57 may be executed in thelens barrel 3.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the image plane movement coefficient K is calculated by the image plane movement coefficient K (the driving amount of thefocus lens 33/the movement amount of the image plane) is exemplified as shown in the above expression, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a configuration in which the calculation is performed as shown in the following expression may be adopted.

Image plane shift coefficient K ═ (amount of shift of image plane/amount of drive of focus lens 33)

Further, in this case, thecamera control section 21 can calculate the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max as follows. That is, thecamera control unit 21 can determine the maximum image plane movement coefficient K that indicates the maximum value among the image plane movement coefficients K at each lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32, from the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (unit: pulse/sec), as shown in the following equation_max(unit: pulse/mm), the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (unit: mm/sec) is calculated.

The mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is equal to the mute lower limit lens movement speed V0 b/maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max

For example, in the case of adopting a value calculated by "the amount of movement of the image plane/the amount of driving of thefocus lens 33" as the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the value (absolute value), the larger the amount of movement of the image plane in the case of driving the focus lens by a predetermined value (e.g., 1 mm). In the case of adopting a value calculated by "driving amount of thefocus lens 33/moving amount of the image plane" as the image plane movement coefficient K, the larger the value (absolute value), the smaller the moving amount of the image plane in the case of driving the focus lens by a predetermined value (e.g., 1 mm).

In addition to the above-described embodiment, the limiting operation and the limiting operation control process may be executed when a mute mode for suppressing the driving sound of thefocus lens 33 is set, and the limiting operation control process may not be executed when the mute mode is not set. When the mute mode is set, the drive sound of thefocus lens 33 may be preferentially suppressed, and the restricting operation shown in fig. 57 may be always performed without performing the restricting operation control processing shown in fig. 59.

In the above-described embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K is (the driving amount of thefocus lens 33/the movement amount of the image plane), but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the image plane movement coefficient K is defined as (the amount of movement of the image plane/the amount of driving of the focus lens 33), the maximum image plane movement coefficient K can be used_maxThe control such as the limiting operation is performed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

EXAMPLE 21 st embodiment

Next,embodiment 21 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 21 has the same configuration asembodiment 18 described above, except for the following differences. Fig. 63 shows a table showing the relationship between the lens position (focal length) of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position (imaging distance) of thefocus lens 33 used inembodiment 21 and the image plane movement coefficient K.

That is, inembodiment 21, regions "D0", "X1" and "X2" are provided as regions on the most proximal side than "D1" which is the most proximal side region shown in fig. 47. Similarly, regions "D10", "X3" and "X4" are provided as regions on the infinity side from the region "D9" on the infinity side shown in fig. 47. First, the "D0", "X1" and "X2" regions which are the regions closer to the extreme side, and the "D10", "X3" and "X4" regions which are the regions further to the infinite side will be described below.

Here, as shown in fig. 64, in the present embodiment, the focusinglens 33 is configured to be movable in theinfinity direction 410 and theclose proximity direction 420 on an optical axis L1 indicated by a one-dot chain line in the drawing. A mechanical end point (mechanical end point) 430 in theinfinity direction 410 and amechanical end point 440 in theclose proximity direction 420 are provided with stoppers (not shown) to restrict the movement of thefocus lens 33. That is, the focusinglens 33 is configured to be movable from amechanical end point 430 in theinfinity direction 410 to amechanical end point 440 in theclose proximity direction 420.

However, the range in which thelens control section 37 actually drives thefocus lens 33 is smaller than the above-described range from themechanical end point 430 to themechanical end point 440. Specifically describing the movement range, thelens control unit 37 drives thefocus lens 33 in a range from an infinitesoft limit position 450 provided inside amechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410 to a very closesoft limit position 460 provided inside amechanical end point 440 in the veryclose direction 420. That is, the lens driving section 212 drives thefocus lens 33 between the very closesoft limit position 460 corresponding to the position of the drive limit on the very close side and the infinitesoft limit position 450 corresponding to the position of the drive limit on the infinite side.

The infinitesoft limit position 450 is disposed to the outer side than theinfinite focus position 470. The infinity-side focusing position 470 is a position of the focusinglens 33 corresponding to the position on the infinity side where the photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 and thediaphragm 36 can focus. The reason why the infinitesoft limit position 450 is provided at such a position is that when focus detection by the contrast detection method is performed, there may be a peak of the focus evaluation value at theinfinite focus position 470. That is, if theinfinity focus position 470 and theinfinity limit position 450 are made to coincide, there is a problem that the peak of the focus evaluation value existing at theinfinity focus position 470 cannot be recognized as the peak, and in order to avoid such a problem, theinfinity limit position 450 is set to be located outside theinfinity focus position 470. Likewise, the very closesoft limit position 460 is disposed further outboard than the very close in-focus position 480. Here, the very close focusingposition 480 is a position of the focusinglens 33 corresponding to a position closest to the side where the photographing optical system including thelenses 31, 32, 33, and 35 and thediaphragm 36 can focus.

The "D0" region shown in fig. 63 is a position corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460, and the "X1" and "X2" regions are regions located on the very close side of the very close soft limit position, and are, for example, a position corresponding to themechanical end point 440 in the veryclose direction 420, a position between the very close soft limit position and theend point 440, and the like. The "D10" region shown in fig. 63 is a position corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450, and the "X3" and "X4" regions are regions closer to the infinite side than the infinite soft limit position, and are, for example, a position corresponding to themechanical end point 430 in theinfinite direction 410, a position between the infinite soft limit position and theend point 430, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", and … "K90" in the "D0" region corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460 of these regions can be set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min. Similarly, the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450 can be set as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max。

In the present embodiment, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 11", "α 21", … "α 91" in the "X1" region are smaller than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", … "K90" in the "D0" region. Likewise, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 12", "α 22", … "α 92" in the "X2" region are smaller than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K10", "K20", … "K90" in the "D0" region. In addition, the values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 13", "α 23", … "α 93" in the "X3" region are larger than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region. The values of the image plane movement coefficients "α 14", "α 24", … "α 94" in the "X4" region are larger than the values of the image plane movement coefficients "K110", "K210", … "K910" in the "D10" region.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K ("K10", "K20" … "K90") in "D0" is set to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient K ("K110", "K210" … "K910") in "D10" is set to the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. In particular, the "X1", "X2", "X3" and "X4" regions are small regions that are required for driving thefocus lens 33 or not driving thefocus lens 33 depending on the conditions of aberrations, mechanical mechanisms, and the like. Therefore, even if the image plane movement coefficients "α 11", "α 21", … "α 94" corresponding to the "X1", "X2", "X3", and "X4" regions are set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxIt also does not help with proper autofocus control (e.g., speed control of the focusing lens, mute control, gap fill control, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient in the region "D0" corresponding to the very closesoft limit position 460 is set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe image plane movement coefficient in the "D10" region corresponding to the infinitesoft limit position 450 is set as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxBut is not limited thereto.

For example, even if the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the regions "X1", "X2" on the very near side from the very near soft limit position and the regions "X3" and "X4" on the infinite side from the infinite soft limit position are stored in thelens memory 38, the image plane movement coefficient that is the smallest among the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the positions of the focus lens included in the search range (scanning range) of the contrast AF may be set as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minSetting the maximum image plane movement coefficient of the image plane movement coefficients corresponding to the position of the focus lens included in the search range of the contrast AF as the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max. Further, the image plane corresponding to the veryclose focus position 480 may be setThe motion coefficient is set to be the minimum image plane motion coefficient K_minThe image plane shift coefficient corresponding to theinfinity position 470 is set as the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_max。

Alternatively, in the present embodiment, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set so that the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the minimum value when thefocus lens 33 is driven to the vicinity of the verysoft limit position 460. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set as follows: the image plane movement coefficient K when driven to the vicinity of the extremely closesoft limit position 460 is made to be the smallest value as compared with when thefocus lens 33 is moved to any position between the extremely closesoft limit position 460 and the infinitesoft limit position 450.

Similarly, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set so that the image plane movement coefficient K becomes the maximum value when thefocus lens 33 is driven to the vicinity of the infinitesoft limit position 450. That is, the image plane movement coefficient K may be set as follows: the image plane movement coefficient K when driven to the vicinity of the infinitesoft limit position 450 is made to be the maximum value, as compared with when thefocus lens 33 is moved to any position from the very closesoft limit position 460 to the infinitesoft limit position 450.

EXAMPLE 22 best mode for carrying out the invention

Next,embodiment 22 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 22 has the same configuration asembodiment 18 described above, except for the following differences. That is, it differs in the following points: in the above-described 18 th embodiment, the form in which only the image plane movement coefficient K corresponding to the focus drive range of thefocus lens 33 is stored in thelens memory 38 has been exemplified, but in the 22 th embodiment, the correction coefficients K0, K1 are also stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 uses the correction coefficients K0, K1 stored in thelens memory 38 to adjust the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxCorrected and transmitted to thecamera body 2.

Fig. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of manufacturing variations of thelens barrel 3. For example, in the present embodiment, thelens barrel 3 emits lightMinimum image plane movement coefficient K in design of optical system and design stage of mechanical mechanism_minSet to "100", thelens memory 38 stores the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min"100". However, in the mass production process of thelens barrel 3, a manufacturing variation occurs due to a manufacturing error or the like at the time of mass production, and the minimum image plane shift coefficient K_minThe normal distribution shown in FIG. 65 is shown.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K in the mass production process of thelens barrel 3 is used as the reference_minThe correction coefficient K0 is determined to be "-1" from the normal distribution, and "-1" is stored as the correction coefficient K0 in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3. Thelens control unit 37 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_min("100") and a correction coefficient K0 ("-1"), for the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrecting (100-1 equals to 99), and correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("99") to thecamera body 2.

In addition, for example, in the stage of designing the optical system and the mechanical mechanism, the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxSet to "1000", thelens memory 38 stores the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max"1000". Maximum image plane movement coefficient K in batch production process_maxDistributed according to the normal distribution, and the maximum image plane shift coefficient K distributed according to the normal distribution_maxIn the case where the average value of (1) is "1010", "+ 10" is stored as the correction coefficient K1 in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3. Thelens control unit 37 uses the maximum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_max("1000") and a correction coefficient K1 ("+ 10"), for the maximum image plane shift coefficient K_maxCorrecting (1000+10 is 1010), and correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max("1010") to thecamera body 2.

Further, the above-mentioned minimum image planemovement coefficient K_min100, maximum image plane movement coefficient K_max"1000", correction coefficient K0 "-1", correction systemEach value of the number K1 "+ 10" is exemplary, and any value can be set, of course. In addition, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe correction of (2) is not limited to addition and subtraction, and various operations such as multiplication and division can be combined.

23 th embodiment

Next,embodiment 23 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 23 has the same configuration asembodiment 19 described above, except for the following differences. That is, inembodiment 23, the correction coefficient K2 is stored in thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3, and thelens control unit 37 corrects the minimum image plane shift coefficient K using the correction coefficient K2 stored in thelens memory 38_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and thelens control section 37 and thecamera control section 21 use the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minThe gap filling control is performed, which is different from the above-describedembodiment 19, but has the same configuration.

That is, as described above, inembodiment 19, thelens control unit 37 transmits the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to thecamera control unit 21_minAnd a gap amount G (see steps S2301 and S2302 of fig. 56), thecamera control unit 21 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd a gap amount G to calculate an image plane movement amount IG. When "image plane movement amount IG" is equal to or smaller than "predetermined image plane movement amount IP", it is determined that gap stuffing is "unnecessary", and control is performed such that gap stuffing drive is not performed during focus drive.

However, on the other hand, the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is caused by a manufacturing error or the like at the time of mass production of thelens barrel 3_minIf a deviation occurs (see fig. 65), or if the mechanical mechanism of thelens barrel 3 changes over time (wear of gears for driving lenses, wear of members for holding lenses, etc.), the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is set to be the smallest value_minIn case of change, there isIt is not possible to perform appropriate gap filling driving. Therefore, in the present embodiment, thelens memory 38 stores the image plane movement coefficient K in consideration of the minimum image plane movement coefficient_minThelens control unit 37 uses the correction coefficient K2 so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is equal to the correction coefficient K2 of the deviation or change_minCorrecting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to be larger than the value before correction_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2.

For example, in the present embodiment, when a value of "100" is stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in thelens memory 38_minAnd stores a value of "0.9" as the correction coefficient K2, thelens control section 37 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_min("100") and correction coefficient K2 ("0.9"), for the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrecting (100 × 0.9 ═ 90), and correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("90") to thecamera body 2. Thecamera control unit 21 uses the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min(90) and a gap amount G, and when the predetermined image plane movement amount IP is satisfied, it is determined that gap stuffing is not required and control is not performed during focus driving, and when the predetermined image plane movement amount IP is satisfied, it is determined that gap stuffing is required and control is performed during focus driving.

In this way, in the present embodiment, by using the correction coefficient K2, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction is used_minMinimum image plane movement coefficient K of ('100') minimum_min("90") to determine if gap packing is required. Therefore, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction is used_minIn the case of ("100"), it is easier to determine that gap packing is "necessary", and the following effects are obtained: even when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is caused by manufacturing errors, secular variations, or the like_minEven when the change occurs, the gap filling drive can be performed reliably, and the focusing can be performed reliably.

For example, the correction coefficient K2 is preferably set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression in consideration of manufacturing errors, secular changes, and the like.

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_minX 0.8 is less than or equal to the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min< minimum image plane movement coefficient before correction K_min

The correction coefficient K2 can be set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression, for example.

0.8≤K2＜1

Further, in the present embodiment, the correction factor K is used for correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient_minThe correction coefficient K2 is used for correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe correction coefficient K3 is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control section 37 corrects the maximum image plane movement coefficient K using the correction coefficient K3_maxAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

EXAMPLE 24 EXAMPLE

Next,embodiment 24 of the present invention will be explained.Embodiment 24 has the same configuration asembodiment 20 described above, except for the following differences. That is, in the above-describedembodiment 20, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in thelens memory 38 is used_minAn example of mute control (restricting operation) is performed. In contrast, the 24 th embodiment is different from the 20 th embodiment in that: thelens memory 38 of thelens barrel 3 stores a correction coefficient K4, and thelens control unit 37 corrects the minimum image plane shift coefficient K using the correction coefficient K4 stored in thelens memory 38_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and thelens control section 37 and thecamera control section 21 use the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minAnd carrying out mute control.

As described above, inembodiment 20, thelens control unit 37 transmits the current image plane movement coefficient K to thecamera control unit 21_curMinimum image plane movement coefficient K_minMaximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxAnd a mute lower limit lens movement speed V0b (see step S2501 of fig. 59)) Thecamera control unit 21 calculates the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max (see step S2502 in fig. 59). Thecamera control unit 21 determines that the limiting operation is "permitted" when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc for focus detection > the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is satisfied, and determines that the limiting operation is "prohibited" when the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc for focus detection < the mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max is satisfied.

However, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is caused by a manufacturing error (see fig. 65) or the like at the time of mass production of thelens barrel 3_minWhen the deviation occurs, or when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is caused by a secular change in the mechanical mechanism of the lens barrel 3 (wear of the gear for driving the lens, wear of the member for holding the lens, etc.)_minIf the change occurs, appropriate mute control (operation restriction) may not be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K will be considered_minThe deviation and the changed correction coefficient K4 are stored in thelens memory 38. Thelens control section 37 uses the correction coefficient K4 so that the minimum image plane movement coefficient K is_minCorrecting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K to be smaller than the value before correction_minAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2.

For example, in the present embodiment, when a value of "100" is stored as the minimum image plane movement coefficient K in thelens memory 38_minAnd stores a value of "0.9" as the correction coefficient K4, thelens control section 37 uses the minimum image plane movement coefficient K stored in the lens memory 38_min("100") and correction coefficient K4 ("0.9"), for the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_minCorrecting (100 × 0.9 ═ 90), and correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("90") to thecamera body 2. Thecamera control unit 21 uses the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("90"), it is determined whether or not the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc < mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max for focus detection is established.

In the present embodiment, by using the correction coefficient K4, a minimum image smaller than that before correction is usedCoefficient of plane movement K_min(100) minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min("90") and the minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction are used to determine whether the image plane movement speed V1a × Kc < mute lower limit image plane movement speed V0b _ max for focus detection is satisfied_minThe operation is more easily determined as "prohibited" than the case of the ("" 100 ""). Therefore, the following special effects are obtained: even when the minimum image plane shift coefficient K is caused by manufacturing errors, secular variations, or the like_minEven when the change occurs, excessive restricting operation can be suppressed, and focusing can be performed reliably.

For example, the correction coefficient K4 is preferably set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression in consideration of manufacturing errors, secular changes, and the like.

Minimum image plane movement coefficient K before correction_minX 0.8 is less than or equal to the corrected minimum image plane movement coefficient K_min< minimum image plane movement coefficient before correction K_min

The correction coefficient K4 can be set so as to satisfy the following conditional expression, for example.

0.8≤K4＜1

In addition, in the present embodiment, the correction factor K is used for correcting the minimum image plane movement coefficient_minThe correction coefficient K4 is used for correcting the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe correction coefficient K5 is stored in thelens memory 38, and thelens control section 37 corrects the maximum image plane movement coefficient K using the correction coefficient K5_maxAnd transmitted to thecamera body 2, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

The above-described embodiments are described for easy understanding of the present invention, and are not described for limiting the present invention. Therefore, the elements disclosed in the above embodiments are intended to include all design modifications and equivalents that fall within the technical scope of the present invention. The above embodiments can also be used in appropriate combinations.

For example, in the above-described 18 th to 24 th embodiments, the system is assumed to be moved in the minimum image plane when the focal length is not changed (that is, when thezoom lens 32 is not driven)Number K_minWhen the change occurs, it is determined that some abnormality such as a communication abnormality, a circuit abnormality, an abnormality of a storage unit (memory), a power supply abnormality has occurred, but the maximum image plane movement coefficient K may be set to be the maximum image plane movement coefficient K when the focal length is not changed_maxWhen the change has occurred, it is determined that some abnormality has occurred. Alternatively, the image is moved by the coefficient K at the minimum image plane without changing the focal length_minAnd a maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxWhen at least one of them is changed, it is determined that some abnormality has occurred. In particular, according to the present embodiment, the minimum image plane movement coefficient K can be used_minOr the maximum image plane movement coefficient K_maxThe focus adjustment control device can provide a particularly advantageous effect that it is possible to provide a highly reliable focus adjustment control device because it is possible to detect an abnormality such as a communication abnormality by a simple process.

In addition, although thelens memory 38 stores the table showing the relationship between each lens position and the image plane movement coefficient K shown in fig. 47 in the above-described 18 th to 24 th embodiments, thelens memory 38 may store the table in thelens control unit 37 instead of storing the table in thelens memory 38. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the table showing the relationship between the lens position of thezoom lens 32 and the lens position of thefocus lens 33 and the image plane movement coefficient K is stored, but a table in which the ambient temperature and the posture of thecamera 1 are added may be provided in addition to such a table.

Thecamera 1 according to the above-described 18 th to 24 th embodiments is not particularly limited, and the present invention may be applied to amirrorless camera 1a having a replaceable lens, as shown in fig. 66, for example. In the example shown in fig. 66, the camera body 2a sequentially transmits captured images captured by theimaging element 22 to thecamera control unit 21, and displays the images on an Electronic Viewfinder (EVF)26 of the observation optical system via the liquidcrystal drive circuit 25. In this case, thecamera control unit 21 can detect the focus adjustment state of the photographing optical system by the contrast detection method by reading the output of theimage pickup device 22, for example, and calculating the focus evaluation value based on the read output. The present invention can be applied to other optical devices such as a digital video camera, a lens-integrated digital camera, and a camera for a mobile phone.

Description of the reference symbols

1 … digital camera

2 … Camera body

21 … Camera control part

22 … image pickup element

29 … Camera Transceiver

291 …Camera side 1 st communication part

292 …Camera side 2 nd communication part

3 … lens barrel

32 … zoom lens

321 … zoom lens driving motor

33 … focusing lens

331 … Focus lens Driving Motor

37 … lens control part

38 … lens memory

39 … lens transmitting and receiving part

381 …lens side 1 st communication part

382 …lens side 2 nd communication part.

Claims (1)

1. An interchangeable lens, which is characterized in that,

the method comprises the following steps: an imaging optical system including a focus adjustment lens;

a driving section that drives the focus adjustment lens in an optical axis direction;

a transceiver unit which transmits and receives signals to and from the camera body; and

a control unit that controls the transmission/reception unit to repeatedly transmit a 1 st image plane movement coefficient determined in accordance with a lens position of a focus adjustment lens included in the imaging optical system and a 2 nd image plane movement coefficient that is independent of the lens position of the focus adjustment lens to the camera body at predetermined intervals,

the control unit changes the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient with time when repeatedly transmitting the 2 nd image plane movement coefficient to the camera body.

Images